•,4^/V  - • V ■»  •'  ' ■ ■ ■>-.  *■■  -fA  i-r»  » ; 

’ Tf  T f • • Jfitl  <&<?<•  ' 


LSI;  ™ »■  • *•  - MSL  •_ 

c-.:"  ^ 


■ 

**  HaFrTT  * ....  ■ 

,-«*’>T  J:  *.  »•  ■'  ...  •-  v.  -A  ..  A’ •>.  * 


44' 


- 


^V-'  * ■*  ....  '**  g*  ^ ^ 

14  ^ . . .«$?**-  - ‘^r  ' v %•  Wmk 

v * • • jjr  V - • 

. . . 


■ft 


• . . v 


*« 


' •- 


• XtLJf-  . ~ # 

'.:  *$§*&;•  j»4 
*v  WJ * 


."  v -•«  :.*•.  ij-m  i-Jj  , j 

.’  " , ..^'  !r  ' 

' ■ £* : ^*7**  "* 

* v V * T--  -«■ 


^s> ' 


5^:.  • ••  ^ ’-^x  1 
?c*'5'\v4. 4s- 


3kt  - 


vf' 

jk.  J-j  n|0^  *jrJ|"5f "aS/Wi 

W- « ■'  ■* 

..-ijfT  ?-  v’"i  ->»/  ^ 


•£* ' ,?;  '■■*, 
. 


V:„> 


. ■*  r. 


~*..  r;-  <4*  W£U-  > v Fa  a?  * • • ~ '*'*»*-  «»  , 

4^1  ^ • -■  T.  **-,+ 

v..  ■ - V v '•  • - '••  ^ 

vV'vVl*  'f«<^  '-."‘i.  r K V'V  ► > <\u«  *£»  v*j;-..v 

* ; ' v\-  , ‘*4. ,/  r • , f ^ % p 

r . * ■->'•* 


r..,  (* 

wxyxjF*  * . . — 

f ■^.  7 * 

» A#  ^ «?/■ 

vZSwT. 


\t ' ijk*  '* 

4Wv-:  -m. 


-.  - 


./£&i 


) 


- 


-4 


f 


/ 


\ 


HAMIftl  n'  .* 


jut  \o 


■ j ma’AAi.p,  a hoi.  / j 

YftAlV  Alii  < T'A,3  3HT  T/  «aOAUOWAJ  \ AT  KSlaO  O J . 

TaA«irniH8  ya^TUfN- 


• »•*  rr  yh^ 

* "1.1  . ■ i ■■  ■ •> 


A 


GRAMMAR 

OF  THE 

HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE* 


BY  JOHN  SHAKESPEAR, 

PROFESSOR  OF  ORIENTAL  LANGUAGES  AT  THE  EAST  INDIA  COMPANY’S 
MILITARY  SEMINARY. 


9 ' ' y / jr9 

“ )f  j3.  ^ ci'  ^ ^ 


SECOND  EDITION. 


LONDON : 

PRINTED  FOR  THE  AUTHOR , 

By  Cox  and  Baylis,  75,  Great  Queen  Stieet,  Lincoln’s-Inn-Fields, 

And  Sold  by  BLACK,  KINGSBURY,  PARBURY,  and  ALLEN,  Booksellers 
to  the  Honourable  East -India  Company,  Leadenhall  Street. 


1818. 


* ' r 

■ 

; 1 

- • 


‘ 


TO 


JAMES  PATTISON,  Esq.  Chairman. 

CAMPBELL  MARJORIBANKS,  Esq.  Deputy  Chairman. 


Jacob  Bosanquet,  Esq. 

The  Hon.  Wm.  F.  Elphinstone, 
Joseph  Cotton,  Esq. 

Charles  Grant,  Esq. 

George  Smith,  Esq.  M.  P. 
Edward  Parry,  Esq. 

Sweny  Toone,  Esq. 

William  Astell,  Esq. 

R.  Chicheley  Plowden,  Esq. 
John  Hudleston,  Esq. 

John  Inglis,  Esq. 


Thomas  Reid,  Esq. 

John  Bebb,  Esq. 

Sir  John  Jackson,  Bart.  M.  P. 
George  A.  Robinson,  Esq. 
William  Wigram,  Esq. 

James  Daniell,  Esq. 

John  Bladen  Taylor,  Esq.  M.  P 
William  Stanley  Clarke,  Esq. 
John  Thornhill,  Esq. 

John  Lumsden,  Esq. 

George  Raikes,  Esq. 


DIRECTORS 


FOR 

MANAGING  THE  AFFAIRS 

OF  THE 

J^orL  <UmtcB  Company  of  a^ercfmntis  of  Cngland, 

TRADING  TO  THE  EAST-INDIES  *. 

THE  SECOND  EDITION  OF 

THIS  GRAMMAR, 

PUBLISHED  UNDER  THEIR  PATRONAGE, 
is, 

WITH  GREAT  DEFERENCE  AND  RESPECT, 

DEDICATED  BY 

their  most  obedient,  and 

MOST  HUMBLE  SERVANT, 

THE  AUTHOR. 


London,  3d  December  1818. 


n?<  > t 


J ...  i > suioijsiO  • vi:.o  ims  an'  (c  \vi\  -j ■ - ■ 

Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2016  --i'  • m u- ' 1 

: ,'  ^uorit  , c)Lsib  Idbaa  hsiO  to 

■'  f . • " 

c nij.  ;cj  oi  sids  £iasK  ewbj  '.-aqinoOi  «•  bill  ?8i>3  . 

t jbalwor?..  & £j3iiinp9£  ai  bb  rbri*  oT  nho  -v  y^ftiMciab 
sdl  dim  3 til  1 1 3CQ6>  3lfl  16  t8“»l3EI6da  sdi  io 
• ' , r4i  . ivJW  ''  • '■<  ' : - 

oi  anirftbob  lima  jormfcc*  *ic  bit  3iil  bt 

, -•/  - . 

,j  . . . rL.i'.j-  < - 4 >r  - 


https://archive.org/details/grammarofhindust00shak_1 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


Since  the  very  copious  and  original  Grammar  of  the 
Hindustani  Language,  published  by  Dr.  Gilchrist  at 
Calcutta  in  1796,  has  become  out  of  print,  the  students 
of  that  useful  dialect,  though  much  increased  in  num- 
ber by  the  provident  arrangements  of  the  Honourable 
East-India  Company,  have  been  able  to  obtain  no 
elementary  work  for  their  aid  in  acquiring  a knowledge 
of  the  characters,  at  the  same  time  with  the  gramma- 
tical rules,  of  the  language.  The  following  attempt 
has,  therefore,  been  made  to  supply  this  deficiency. 
And  the  author  cannot  omit  declaring,  in  the  first 
place,  that  he  stands  indebted  to  Dr.  Gilchrist  chiefly 
for  such  information  as  he  may  have  acquired,  relative 


VI 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


to  the  principles  of  the  language  here  undertaken  to  be 
explained  ; this  obligation,  too,  was  conferred,  not  only 
bv  means  of  that  gentleman’s  valuable  publications,  but 
also  through  oral  instruction  most  liberally  and  kindly 
communicated. 

The  chief  aim  in  this  work  is  to  exhibit  the  outlines 
of  grammar  on  a reduced  scale,  yet  so,  that  no  material 
object  may  be  passed  unnoticed  or  ill  defined.  But, 
the  rules  of  Prosody  in  Hindustani  being,  like  those 
of  the  Persians,  borrowed  from  the  Arabic,  are  omitted 
altogether;  partly  because  they  occur  in  various  other' 
works,  and  partly  because  they  seem  an  object  of  but 
little  moment  to  European  students  of  this  dialect  in 
general : and  the  chapter  on  Syntax  is  limited  generally 
to  such  peculiarities,  as  differ  from  the  idiom  of  the 
English. 

To  determine  pronunciation  in  the  Persian  character, 
the  Arabic  vowels  and  other  orthographical  marks  are 
noted,  where  they  may  appear  requisite  for  that  purpose 
and  can  be  introduced  : yet,  the  vowel  fat’ha  is  com- 
monly omitted,  and  ought  in  most  instances  to  be 
understood  if  some  other  vowel  or  jazm  is  not  marked ; 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


VII 


except,  however,  before  the  ivdw-i-maf  full  and  the  ydi- 
- i-mafliul , which,  being  incapable  of1  the  Arabic  no- 
tation, are  necessarily  designated  without  any  vowel 
preceding;  and,  except  after  a final  consonant,  which 
is  always  silent  when  no  vowel  is  written  with  it. 

In  the  Persian  characters,  too,  the  letters  cp  and  j 
are  here  marked  thus  <3,  J,  ^ when  used  to  repre- 
sent the  Indian  5"  ‘ <f ; though,  it  may  be  noticed 

that  not  only  this  expedient  is  adopted  by  the  people  of 
India,  but  the  distinction  is  very  commonly  made  by  a 
small  Is  written  over  these  letters.  The  round  form  of 
the  letter  s is,  also,  here  preferred  when  it  is  subjoined 
to  another  consonant  for  the  purpose  of  representing 
some  aspirated  Indian  letter ; as  U kha  for  : but, 
the  long  form  is  distinctively  used  in  other  cases;  so 
kahd  for  And,  for  the  guidance  of  learners  in 

. 9 ? 

the  pronunciation,  the  <j3  u}j  or  nasal  win,  answering 
to  the  Devanagari  anusivdra , is  when  final,  in  the  body 
of  this  work,  distinguished  by  an  additional  point  super- 
scribed ; as  ^ : in  the  appendix,  however,  to  conform  to 
the  usual  practice  of  the  people  of  India,  it  is  denoted 
by  u simply. 


vm 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


To  facilitate  the  progress  of  learners,  the  pronun- 
ciation of  Hindustani  words  or  combinations  of  letters, 
used  at  the  beginning  of  the  work,  is  deciphered  in 
Roman  characters : but,  the  Arabic  letter  ^ after  the 
practice  of  Meninski  is  signified  by  a small  figure  of 
itself ; thus  *:  and  the  Sanskrit  visarga  (•)  or  the  final 
s called  is  not  noticed  in  the  Roman  charac- 

ters ; it  being  almost  imperceptibly  if  at  all  sounded. 

Some  of  the  rules  for  the  inflection  of  Nouns, 
Pronouns,  and  Verbs,  given  in  the  third,  fourth,  and 
fifth  chapters,  are  divided  into  two  parts ; the  first 
division  containing  what  is  most  general  or  most 
important,  whilst  the  second  comprises  the  anomalies, 
the  particular  variations,  or  observations  of  inferiour 
moment : so  that  the  learner  may  discretionally  commit 
to  memory  the  first  part  only,  or  the  whole. 

From  the  copious  list  of  the  most  common  verbal 
roots,  in  the  Appendix,  a great  number  of  useful  words 
may  be  derived,  by  changing  the  neuter  into  active  or 
transitive,  and  the  latter  into  causal,  verbs;  and,  also, 
by  observing  what  portions  of  a verb  may  be  used 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


IX 


substantively,  agreeable  to  the  methods  of  derivation 
explained  in  the  Grammar. 

To  Mr.  Charles  Wilkins,  well  known  in  the  various 
departments  of  Oriental  literature,  the  specimens  of 
writing  in  both  the  Persian  and  Nagari  characters  are 
wholly  due  ; but  the  author  gladly  seizes  this  opportu- 
nity of  acknowledging,  that  he  is  under  still  weightier 
obligations  to  that  gentleman,  for  advice  and  assist- 
ance liberally  imparted  in  many  other  respects. 


b 


CORRECTIONS. 


Page 

D 

7,  line 

18,  for 

ic-yi read 

. . 

58,  — 

12,  for  terminations 

— 

termination. 



67,  - 

6,  for 

— 

— 

68,  — 

7,  for 

— 

69,  — 

23,  for 

— 

— 

75,  - 

3,  for 

— 

81,  - 

21,  for 

— 

98,  — 

5,  for 

/ 

••  S’ 

— 

— 

107,  — 

15,  for 

uu 

s 

— 

V 

108,  — 

3,  for 

o 

w 

— 

O 

131,  — 

2,  for 

c 

— 

JjU 

148,  — 

17,  for 

p 

— 

*£ 

— 

150,  — 

1,  for 

u 

— 

u 

— 

167,  — 

11,  for 

o 

SJuJ 

— 

c 

*Ju> 

INDEX  TO  THE  CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  I. 

PAGE 

On  the  Alphabets  and  orthographical  marks  ...  1 

Persian  Alphabet  ...  3 

Vowels  and  other  marks  in  the  Arabic  orthography <4 

Remarks  on  the  writing  of  the  Arabic  characters  6 

Names  of  various  letters,  or  combinations  of  letters,  for  which 
there  are  not  distinct  characters  in  the  Arabic,  but  which  exist 

in  the  Nagari  alphabet 7 

Devanagari  Alphabet,  with  the  names  of  the  letters,  &c.  ...  12 

Remarks  on  the  writing  of  the  Nagari  characters  14 

Characters  adopted  for  such  Persian  letters  as  have  no  exact 
correspondents  in  the  Nagari. ...  15 

CHAPTER  II. 

On  Pronunciation  1(> 

CHAPTER  III. 

On  the  Noun  ...  ...  23 

Division  of  Nouns  into  different  kinds  24 

On  Gender  24 

Formation  of  Feminines  from  Masculines  ...  ...  26 

b 2 


\ 


INDEX  TO  TIIE  CONTENTS. 

m. 

PAGE 

On  Number,  and  the  formation  of  the  Plural 27 

On  Change  or  Inflection  before  Postpositions 28 

Cases,  how  formed 29 

Vocative,  Interjections  used  with  it 31 

Construction  of  Nouns,  adopted  from  the  Persian  and  Arabic...  31 

Declension  of  Nouns  ...  33 

Peculiarities  in  the  Inflection  of  Numerals  and  Nouns  of  Time  36 

Adjectives,  declension  of 37 

Ordinals  of  Number,  how  formed  and  declined  39 

Comparison  of  Adjectives,  how  expressed  39 

Use  of  the  adjunct  of  similitude  L» 40 

CHAPTER  IV. 

On  the  Pronoun  41 

Declension  and  use  of  Pronouns  42 

Varieties  in  Declension  and  peculiarities  in  Construction  to  which 

Pronouns  are  liable  46 

Composition  of  Pronouns 47 

»*  *».  - k .#»•  •Rrf'il'J.  J 

CHAPTER  V. 

On  the  Verb  48 

The  Imperative  in  the  second  person  singular,  or  The  Root  ...  48 

The  Infinitive,  how  formed  and  declined 49 

The  Past  Participle 49 

The  Present  Participle  ...  51 

The  Past  Conjunctive  Participle  51 


INDEX  TO  THE  CONTENDS. 


PAGE 


The  Past  Tenses ; namely,  the  past  indefinite,  £ke  pluperfect  or 
past  past,  the  past  definite  or  past  present,  the  past  future, 

and  the  past  conditional  or  optative  52 

The  Present  Tenses  ; namely,  the  present  indefinite,  the  imper- 
fect or  present  past,  the  present  definite  or  present  present, 

and  the  present  future  ...  55 

Future  Tenses 56 

The  Imperative  58 

Respectful  or  Precative  forms  of  the  Future  and  Imperative  ...  58 

Transitive  and  Causal  Verbs,  how  formed  59 

Compound  Verbs,  how  formed  61 

Derivative  Verbs,  how  obtained  64 

Passive  sense  of  a Verb,  how  denoted  64 

Synopsis  of  additions  to  the  root  to  form  the  Infinitive,  Participles, 

and  Indefinite  Tenses 65 

Auxiliaries  used  in  forming  the  Definite  Tenses  of  Verbs  ...  66 

The  Substantive  Verb  * ...  66 

Conjugation  of  the  Verb  U.  go  67 

Conjugation  of  the  Verb  ys  be,  become 72 

Conjugation  of  a regular  Intransitive  Verb  77 

Conjugation  of  a Transitive  or  Causal  Verb  in  the  active  and 
passive  voices  82 


CHAPTER  VI. 


On  Indeclinable  Words  ...  . 

Postpositions  and  Prepositions 
Adverbs  


• • • 


93 

...  ...  95 


93 


INDEX  TO  THE  CONTENTS. 


PAGE 


Conjunctions  ...  ...  ...  ...  101 

Interjections  102 

CHAPTER  VII. 

On  the  Numerals  ...  103 

The  Cardinals,  with  the  Arabic  and  Indian  figures 103 

The  Ordinals,  and  how  formed  107 

The  Aggregate  or  Collective  Numbers  107 

The  Distributives,  the  Proportionals,  and  the  Reduplicatives  107 
The  Fractionals  ...  ...  108 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


On  the  formation  of  Derivatives  ...  ...  ..110 

Abstract  Nouns,  how  formed 110 

Noun,  denoting  the  Agent,  how  formed 112 

Local  and  Instrumental  Nouns,  how  derived 114 

Diminutive  Nouns,  how  obtained  115 

Adjectives,  how  formed  from  Substantives  116 

Adjectives  of  Intensity,  how  obtained  ...  119 

Adjectives  and  Adverbs,  formed  from  Pronouns  119 

Transitive  and  Causal  Verbs,  how  derived  120 

Verbs,  how  derived  from  Nouns  ...  121 


CHAPTER  IX. 

On  the  Syntax ...  122 

The  usual  arrangement  of  words  in  a sentence  122 

Regimen  of  Nouns  of  various  genders  122 


INDEX  TO  THE  CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Construction  of  Nouns,  and  extraordinary  uses  of  the  Postposi- 
tions l£,  &c ...123 

Cases  used  with  the  Verb.  Postpositions  often  understood  ...  124: 
Construction  of  Postpositions,  and  of  words  used  postpositfvely . . . 125 
What  Postpositions  are  more  usual  and  polite  than  others  of  a 
similar  meaning  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  12o 

jj;)  \ ' ' ' " * " / 

Construction  of  the  Adjective  with  its  Substantive 125 

With  numerals  a singular  Noun  generally  preferred  126 

The  Personal  Pronouns,  when  omitted  and  how  placed.  The 

elliptical  use  of  feminine  genitive  Pronouns,  &c 126 

Precedence  of  the  first  person.  Idiomatical  way  of  relating  the 


words  of  a third  person 126 

The  second  personal  Pronoun,  how  used.  Terms  of  respect 

adopted  for  it,  and  of  humility  for  the  first  person  127 

Uses  of  the  Pronouns  Sj  and  ^ 128 

Uses  of  the  Pronoun  <_JT  129 


Adjuncts  to  the  Pronouns,  &c.  to  denote  peculiarity,'  &c 129 


Peculiar  uses  of  the  Interrogatives 130 

Peculiar  uses  of  the  Relative  and  Correlative 131 

Peculiar  uses  of  ,_AS  and  ^sr1  ...  131 

Concord  of  the  Verb  with  its  governing  Noun  ; and  the  construc- 
tion with  ,J 132 

Infinitive  or  Gerund  ; peculiarities  in  the  use  of  it 133 

Past  and  Present  Participles  ; peculiar  uses  of  them  134: 

Past  Indefinite  Tense  used  in  a present  or  future  sense  136 

Present  Tense  used  in  the  sense  of  the  future 136 

Indefinite  Future  or  Aorist ; peculiar  uses  of  it  136 

Adverbs  of  Negation  how  used  137 


JNDEX  TO  THE  CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

The  Conjunctions  and  y*.  in  what  senses  used  

The  Conjunction  jj\  or  or  j how  used  13 

The  Conjunctions and  y*.  to  be  answered  by  ^ or  y ...  139 

* f 

Uses  of  or^^s-  and  their  correlatives  or  ^ J ...  139 

Affirmation  or  assent  how  expressed  140 

The  residence  of  any  one  how  denoted  140 

Words  of  similar  meaning  or  of  like  sound  used  together 140 

Appellations  of  Honour  attributed  to  different  classes  of  men  ...  142 

APPENDIX. 

Technical  terms  of  Grammar 143 

% 

Days  of  the  Week  anjd  names  of  the  Months  151 

A short  story  in  the  Nagarl  and  Persian  characters,  with  a literal 

translation  in  English 153 

A collection  of  some  of  the  most  useful  Verbal  Roots  161 

Specimens  of  Writing  in  the  Persian  and  NagarT  characters  ...  193 


A 

GRAMMAR 

OF  THE 

MIJVJBUSTtAJVI  lL*AJVGU*AGEa 


CHAPTER  I. 

The  Alphabets  and  Orthographical  Marks. 

r 

I he  dialect  most  generally  used  in  India,  especially  among 
the  Muhammadan  inhabitants,  the  officers  of  government  and 
the  military,  is  called  Urdu  (camp)  or  Urdu  zaban  (camp-lan- 
guage),  which  seem  to  have  been  its  first  and  most  appropriate 
appellations : but,  it  is  also  termed  Rekhta  (scattered)  on 
account  of  the  variety  of  languages  interspersed  in  it ; though 
this  name  is  said  to  be  more  peculiarly  applied  to  poetick  com- 


£ 


2 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


positions,  formed,  in  the  language  here  treated  of,  agreeable 
to  the  style  and  metre  of  the  Persians : from  the  regions  in 
which  it  has  become  current,  it  is  moreover  called  Hindi 
and  Hindustani.  The  groundwork  of  it  appears  to  be  the 
Hindavi,  formerly  prevalent  in  the  extensive  empire,  of  which 
Canoj  was  the  capital ; * or,  the  existing  dialect  of  the 
district  of  Brnj,  called  Braj  Bhahha.  With  the  previous 
language  of  the  country,  however,  freely  altered  in  many 
respects  to  suit  their  idiom,  the  Musalman  invaders  and  rulers 
incorporated  a great  number  of  Persian,  Arabic,  Turkish  and 
other  words  ; thus  forming  the  modern  Hindustani.  Such 
being  the  various  sources  whence  it  is  derived,  it  is  found 
written  in  the  Persian  or  Arabic,  as  well  as  the  Devanagar!  or 
proper  Indian,  characters.  These  two  alphabets  will,  there- 
fore, now  be  given  in  the  first  place,  together  with  the  subsi- 
diary marks  or  signs  adopted  in  the  use  of  them. 


* See  Mr.  Colebrooke’s  Dissertation  on  the  Sanskrit  and  Pracrit 
Languages,  in  the  seventh  volume  of  the  Asiatick  Researches. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


3 


PERSIAN  ALPHABET. 

/ 


Names  of  the 
Letters. 

Letters. 

In  Roman 
Letters  usually 
deuoted  by 

Names  of  the 
Letters. 

Letters. 

In  Roman  Letters 
usually  denoted  by 

uf\  alif 

1 

a,  d,  i,  u 

oLs  swad 

U* 

5 

f 

f be 

L-3 

h 

<-'U  zwad 

2 i 

LSiPe 

L-J 

P 

toe 

t 

* I 

Jte 

cv 

t 

zoe 

b 

* 

* 

^ * t 

* SL  X X 

\J se 

Cj 

s 

ain 

t 

, a,  i,  u,  &;c. 

r? jJm 

£ 

j 

ghain 

gh 

Lif  Cfle 

£ 

ch 

Jfe 

f 

L5^  he  * 

h 

t-Jlii  kaf 

J 

k 

^ khe 

* 

kh 

kaf 

c/ 

k 

J'-'  dal 

J 

d 

LAtgdf 

g j 

; Jta  zal 

j 

z 

^ lam 

J 

l 

lJj  re 

J 

r 

j*rrs  mini 

r 

m 

ci ■)  ze 

J 

z 

P 

nun 

u 

n ■ 

ljJ  zhe 

J . 

zh 

j\j  wao 

3 

w,v,u,o,au}8$c.  | 

!•}***  sin 

u* 

s 

^lief 

h 

shin 

A 

U* 

sh 

f.ye 

y > i,  e,  ai,  8$c, 

w 9 S’ 

* Called  by  way  of  discrimination  ( ha-i-huttl)  as  the  other 

S’  ? S- 

+ He  is  termed  jjjfc  ( ha-i-hawwaz ) or  ^la  ( hd-i-mudawwara ). 


B 2 


4 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


The  preceding  alphabet  is  properly  Arabic,  with  the  addi- 
tional characters  i__>  (pe),  _ (che),  J ( zhe ),  and  (gaf),  which 
the  Persians  have  devised  to  represent  such  elementary  sounds 
in  their  language  as  are  foreign  to  the  Arabic  ; and,  the  names 

given  to  the  whole,  in  the  latter  language,  are  < eP  (alif),  b 

(ba),  {ha  ajaml)  the  Persian  ba,  b ( ta ),  15  (tha),  ^ 

(jim),  (jim  ajami ) the  Persian  jim,  U-  (ha),  U- 

( kha ),  Jh  (dal),  Jta  (dhal),  \j  (ra),  \j  ( za ),  \j  (za  ajami ) 

the  Persian  za,  ^ (sin),  (shin),  jL>  (sad),  (zad),  lb 

✓ X " 

(ta),  lb  (za),  ^ (ain),  ^ ( ghain ),  li  (fa),  <_JU  ( kdf ),  <-Jl£ 
(kaf)9  (hqf  ajami ) the  Persian  haf,  ^ (lam),  ^ 

9 

(mim),  (nun),  (wa),  Ifc  (ha),  b (pa),  agreeable  to  the  order 
in  which  they  are  before  arranged. 

The  short  vowels  and  other  orthographical  signs  are, 

✓ ✓/-  y.  " 

jij  (zabar)  or  (fat'ha),  denoted  by  a. 

c ^ t,  ^ 

j) j (zer)  or (kasr)  or  x^~£  (kasra),  denoted  by  i. 

9 • ^ ^ 

JL^  (pesh)  or  ^ (zamm)  or  <u^  (zamma),  denoted  by  u. 

%■  S * 

ajA&  (hamza)  which  is  always  initial  in  a syllable,  whilst  alif 
must  be  medial  or  final ; and  which  is  uniformly  moveable 

or  accompanied  by  one  of  the  vowels  above  noticed,  whilst 

t 

alif  is  always  quiescent  or  devoid  of  them  : so,  in  <__d  (ab) 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


5 


the  first  letter  is  rightly  termed  harnza  ; but,  in  b ( ba ) the 
second  is  alif. 

or  (*j»-  ( jazm ),  which  shews  that  the  subscribed  letter  is  ^L 
(sakhi)  quiescent,  that  is,  having  no  vowel  to  be  sounded 
after  it. 

( madda ) or  (madd),  which  placed  over  1 («/*/’)  called 
then  ( alif-i-mamduda ) extends  its  sound;  hamza 

and  o/t/" being  in  such  cases  united  : so  <__>T  (<z&)  water. 

w C ^ 

(tashdid),  which  shews  that  the  letter  underneath  must  be 

V.>> 

pronounced  double:  so,  in  L-j  ( sunna ) to  hear. 

•O  G ^ 

J-jj  (was/),  which  serves  to  join  together  two  Arabic  words, 
the  latter  having  the  article  Jl  ( al ) prefixed,  the  vowel  of 

G G -Op 

which  is  dropped  in  pronunciation;  as JA  (ahhiru-l- 
amr)  the  end  of  the  affair  : and,  the  J (/am)  is  converted  in 
sound  to  the  next  following  letter,  if  this  be  o o j i j j 
^ js  b )a  J or  which  then  takes  tashdid,  and  is 

"0  -0~Zt  /'/' 

pronounced  as  double  ; so.  ( awammu-n-nas ) Me 

common  people. 

' G 

To  these  may  be  added  the  Arabic  ( tanwin )*  formed,  in 


* Of  the  terms  here  used,  yj  and  y \ and  are  Persian  words, 
the  rest  are  Arabic,  yj  above  an dyj  under  are  given  as  names, to  the 


6 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


writing,  by  doubling  the  vowel  with  which  the  word  termi- 
nates, and  subjoining  alif  if  that  vowel  happens  to  be  fat'ha  ; 

5 9 9 99  *99 

so,  ( khususun ) (khusushi)  (k hususari)  parti- 

cularity, particularly  : the  vowel  in  such  cases  taking  after  it 
the  sound  of  u (nun)  from  which  letter  the  term  is  derived. 


Most  of  the  characters  in  the  Persian  alphabet  admit  of  some 
change  in  appearance  when  combined  with  each  other ; the 
damans  or  final  curves  of  many,  and  the  appendant  line  of 


vowels  from  their  respective  positions  : before , on  account  either 

of  its  being  placed  a little  before  the  consonant  which  it  follows  in 

G 

utterance,  or  of  its  being  sounded  at  the  fore  part  of  the  mouth  : 

G 

opening , because  the  vowel  is  pronounced  with  the  mouth  open  : 

O , 

or  ^ < breaking , because  the  voice  is  broken,  as  it  were,  in  the 
enunciation  : or  contraction , from  the  manner  in  which  the 

G 

lips  are  drawn  together : compression , as  it  is  uttered  with  a 

G 

slight  compression  of  the  throat : ^ amputation , because  the  letter 
over  which  it  is  placed  is  severed  from  the  following  in  pronunciation: 
or  sx*  extension , because  it  prolongs  the  enunciation  of  a letter : 

o ° 

jjAU  corroboration , as  it  doubles  the  power  of  a letter  : conjunc- 


tion,  from  its  joining  together  words:  nunation,  or  addition  of 

the  sound  of  the  letter  ^ (nun). 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


7 

the  mlm,  being  omitted  before  a subsequent  letter  in  the  same 
word  : the  characters,  \ j 3 jjj  and  j however,  admit  not  of 
curtailment  in  any  shape,  or  of  having  any  letter  subjoined  to 
them,  except  occasionally  in  the  broken  or  running  hand  ; and 
the  usual  compounds  l£  (ka),  if  ( ga ),  i!  or  *1  (la),  and  ( (ha), 
might  arrest  the  progress  of  the  learner,  were  they  not  here 
submitted  to  his  observation. 

In  the  Hindustani,  moreover,  there  are  several  elementary 
sounds,  for  which,  though  appropriate  letters  are  found  in  the 
Nagari  system  of  writing,  as  will  be  shortly  exhibited,  yet  no 
corresponding  simple  characters  exist  in  the  Persian  alphabet; 
the  following  combinations,  or  letters  with  extraordinary  marks, 
are  therefore  generally  adopted  to  represent  them. 

1 (for  3f  a)  According  to  the  orthography  of  the  Arabs,  | 
(alif)  has  no  sound  of  itself  when  at  the  beginning  of  a word, 
but  it  takes  that  of  the  accompanying  vowel,  as  well  as  the 
name  hamza  in  such  cases ; this  compound  is  therefore 

9 S.  CO 

called  sj+b  (hamza-i-maftuha)  hamza  withfat'ha. 

T (for  3fT  a ) ajjj^  aj*a>  (hamza-i-maviduda)  or  aj.j^  uJI 
(alif  i-mamduda)  hamza  or  alif  with  madda. 

1 (for  T i)  x}yS*su a (hamza-i-maksura)  hamza  with  kasr. 
In  Arabic  and  Persian  words,  however,  when  hamza  with 


8 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


kasr  follows  alif  im mediately,  the  former  is  termed  <c~Lc  sj+z 
( hamza-i-mulaiyana ) softened  hamza,  and  may  be  distin- 
guished by  two  points  beneath  ; as  «r  i 

^1  (for  \i)  _i.  ^ sj*£>  (hamza-i-maksura  wa  yd - 

-i-mctruf)  hamza  with  kasr  followed  hy  ya-i-maxruf  In 
all  situations,  however,  except  at  the  beginning  of  a word, 

9C,  * 

' ( alif ) is  dropped,  and  the  ^ [ye)  called  <_J.  (yd-i- 

ma*ruf)  the  known  ye,  is  used  either  with  or  without  the 
vowel  here  marked  to  denote  this  sound. 

? J>o  * c, 

'('0r3’w)  (hamza-i-mazmuma)  hamza  with  zamm. 

' > o s.  o 

r (for  ^ m)  ^ (hamza-i-mazmuma  w a waw- 

-i-maxrff)  hamza  with  zamm  followed  by  waw-i-ma*rfif.  In 
all  situations,  however,  except  at  the  beginning  of  a word, 

9 G 

1 (alif)  is  dropped,  and  j (wao)  termed  uJj ( wdw-i - 
- maruf ) the  known  wao,  is  used,  either  with  or  without  the 
vowel  marked  over  the  preceding  letter,  to  denote  this  sound. 

p 0 5- 

j (for  ^ ri)  fj  ( ra-i-maksura ) re  with  kasr. 

(for  ^ ri)  Jb_>  *,*jL  ^ (ra-i-maksura  wa  yd-i- 

maxrif)  re  with  kasr  and  ya-i-mrtruf. 

J (for  Iri)  fj  j ^ (lam  wa  rd-i- 

-maksuratain  muttasilatu-t-talaffuzain ) lam  and  re, 
wn7A  fcasr,  'pronounced  closely  together. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


9 


(for  c\  Iri)  ^ fj  , ^ (te»»  wa  rd-i-mak- 

-suratain  wa  ya-i  ma*ruf ) fern  and  re,  both  with  kasr,  fol- 
lowed by  yd-i-mcfruf. 

) O > /O  £ G 

^ (for  e)  t-fV.  j ( hamza-i-maksura  wa  yu-i- 

-maj'hul)  hamza  with  kasr  and  yd-i-mafhul : but,  for  the 
sound  here  intended  \ ( alif ) is  written  at  the  beginning 
of  a ward  only,  the  letter  (ye)  sufficing  in  the  middle  or 
at  the  end.  As  this  pronunciation  exists  not  in  the  Arabic, 

9 O 

the  t_s  when  used  for  this  purpose  is  called  (maj'hul) 

unknown,  and  there  is  no  method  of  defining  it  by  the  Arabic 
orthography  ; it  may  therefore  be  distinguished  from  (J) 
and  f ( ai ) by  the  circumstance  of  having  no  vowel  prefixed. 

£ N m s-  /o  s.  o 

f\  (for  ai)  j gj* js  ( hamza-i-maftuha  wa  ya- 

- i-sakin ) hamza  with  fat' ha  and  ye  quiescent  : but,  alif  and 
hamza  are  used  at  the  beginning  of  a word  only,  the  letter 

/O  C S’ 

t j termed  J-j  U (yd-i-sakin  ma  kabl  mqftuh) 

ye  quiescent,  the  preceding  letter  having  fat' ha,  serving, 
when  fat'ha  is  written  or  understood  over  the  preceding 
letter,  to  convey  this  sound  in  the  middle  or  at  the  end  of 
a word. 

j!  (for  off  o)  J jlj  j <u ( hamza-i-mazmiima  wa 
waw-i-maj  hul)  hamza  with  zamm  and  waw i-rnaj'hul : but, 

c 


10 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


for  the  sound  here  intended,  alif  is  not  written  except  at 
the  beginning  of  a word,  * ( wdo ) sufficing  if  medial  or  final. 
As  this  pronunciation  is  foreign  to  the  Arabic,  the  . when 

so 

thus  pronounced  is  called  unknown,  and  there  is  no 

mark  to  define  it  in  the  Arabic  orthography ; it  may, 

S s' 

therefore,  be  distinguished  from  .1  ( u ) and  jl  ( au ) by  the 
circumstance  of  having  no  vowel  prefixed. 

t SO  s-  o 

jl  (for  au)  i y,*z>  ( hamza-i-maftuha  wa  waw- 

-i-sdkin)  hamza  with  fat'ha  and  wdo  quiescent  : but  \ {alif) 
cannot  be  written  for  this  purpose  except  at  the  beginning 

so  o 

of  a word,  % [wao),  called  J-j  U f\~>  f (wdw-i-saktn 
ma  kabl  maf  tuh ) wao  quiescent  following  a letter  with 
fat'ha,  sufficing,  if  fat'ha  precedes,  to  denote  this  sound  in 
all  other  cases. 

# . -?  s so  s 

& or  (j  (f°r  n)  (■ nun-i-ghunna ) or  (nun-i- 

-maghnund)  nasal  nun.  But  the  Nagari  mark  may  be 
used  occasionally  for  any  nasal. 

(for  f(h)  aLiij  <_i\s  ( kdfi-sakila ) heavy  kdf. 
f (for  gh)  *LsJ  [kdf  ajami  sakila)  heavy  Persian 

kdf 

S O y ' «t 

^ or  ^ (for  ng)  u_jk  {kdf  ajami  inaghnuna ) nasal 

Persian  kdf. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


1 1 

(for  ^ chh ) aLju  +?>■  (jim  ajcimi  saklla)  heavy  Per- 
sian jim. 

.i>.  (for  ST  jh)  AJj  ^ ( jim-i-sahila ) heavy  jim. 

^ or  ^ (for  ajjiA^b  ( ya-i-maghnuna ) nasal  ye. 

~ 9 s- 

<Jb  (fore  /)  ^b  ( ta  imusakkala ) heavier  te. 

0 5- 

J\  (for  <5  M)  Jail  ^b  ( ta-i-askal ) heaviest  te. 

_ - * 

J>  (for  -d  d)  Jh  ( dal-i-musakkala ) heavier  dal.f 

• .... 

c 

aj>  (for  d cf/i)  JJb\  Jh  ( ddl-i-askaf)  heaviest  dal .-f- 

9 

uor  • (for  tH"  n)  iLA  (; nun-i-sakila ) heavy  nun. 

.y  (for  Ef  th)  tLf  ^b  ( ta-i-sukila ) heavy  te. 
sj  (for  dhj  sLA  Jh'  ( dal-i-sakila ) heavy  dal. 

^ (for  ^ ph)  (iLij  ^*js*  ^b  ( ba-i-ajami  sahila ) heavy  Persian  be. 
^ (for  H bh ) aLii  Jb  ( ba-i-sakild ) heavy  he.% 

— - o 

(for  Ef  4A)  Jii\  < ( kaf-i-askal ) heaviest  kaf. 

y>.  (for  ^ chh)  jil  l5^  ^ (j/»»  0/0WZ  as&a/)  heaviest  Per- 
sian jim. 

+ These  letters  are  sometimes  pronounced  rather  as  r , r/i,  than  d, 
d/j ; in  which  case  they  may,  distinctively,  be  written  j 

j-  in  opposition  to  such  compounds,  called  heavy,  the  simple  Arabic 
letters  are  thus  described  ; <__>  b ( bd  tdzi  khafifa ) the  light 

Arabic  ba  ; ^ grjb  ^ ( jim  tdzi  khafifa)  light  Arabic  jim,  &c. 


12 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


THE  DEVANAGARI  ALPHABET. 


VOWELS. 

3T 

a, 

3TT  a ; 

T h 

< l 

’ ; 3 u, 

3 u\  ^ 

ri, 

r? ;* 

C7) 

C 

Iri * 

Iri  ;* 

e>  §T 

V 

ai ; 3fT  o, 

'SfT  au ; 

♦ 

n ; : 

ah 

(final  li  silent)  or  a. 

C 

ONS 

iONAN' 

rs. 

ka, 

kha  ; 

ga, 

^ gha; 

Z? 

nga* 

cha, 

chha ; 

3T 

j<*> 

5T  jha ; 

^r 

nya* 

E 

ta, 

E 

tha  ; 

da,  t 

dha  ;t 

DT 

na. 

rf 

ta. 

3T 

tha  ; 

da, 

5T 

na. 

pa, 

pha ; 

ha, 

hha  ; 

*T 

ma. 

ya, 

T 

ra, 

la, 

^ va. 

sa,t 

BT 

sha,t 

sa, 

^ ha. 

^7 

ksha.% 

* These  letters  are  very  rarely,  and  some  of  them,  perhaps,  never 
used  in  writing  Hindustani ; but  they  exist  in  this  alphabet  as  necessary 
for  the  language  to  which  it  was  originally  applied. 

+ 3 and  are  frequently  pronounced  rather  as  ra  and  rha  by 
reverting  the  tip  of  the  tongue  to  the  palate;  and,  to  denote  this 
variation,  a point  may  be  subscribed,  as  3"  ra , 7T  rha. 

t STT  has  properly  the  power  of  5 uttered  by  applying  the  tip  of  the 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


13 


The  above  forms  of  the  vowels  are  always  used  when  alone 
or  at  the  beginning  of  a syllable  ; after  consonants,  however, 
there  is  no  character  for  3f  and  the  rest  are  denoted  by  the 
following  letters  : 


T a ; f i,  l ; 


O W,  <\  U * Z ' l)  £ 


u 

% 


n , ^Iri,*  mlrt:* 


e,  ai ; T y,  T au. 

Though,  in  repeating  the  alphabet,  it  is  usual  to  say  a,  a, 
i,  i,  &c.  ka,  kha,  ga , gha,  &c.  simply,  as  noted  above ; yet, 
in  naming  the  letters,  (kiira)  or  ( kdr ) is  generally 

added  to  the  sound  of  each  : so,  3fcfJT^  ( akdr ) the  letter 
^V^TTT  ( kakdr ) the  letter  ; but  ’ the  mark  for  a silent  nasal 
is  called  ( anuswara ),  as  : (final  h silent)  is  termed 

f^TPT.*  ( visarga ). 


When  standing  alone  or  commencing  a syllable,  and  when 
following  a consonant  in  composition,  the  vowels  are  thus  used  : 

^ 

aka  . aka  . iki  . iki  . uku  . uku  . rikri  . rikri  . Iriklri  . 

3^ 

Iriklri  . eke . aikai  . oko  . aukau. 


tongue  to  the  forepart  of  the  palate  ; but,  it  is  also  generally  adopted 
to  represent  the  Arabic  (shin)  : ^ is  sometimes  sounded  as  kha: 
and  ^ as  chha. 


14' 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


The  vowel  is  never  written,  except  at  the  beginning  of 
a word ; and  its  sound  is  inherent  in  all  open  consonants, 
which  no  other  vowel  follows,  or  which  have  not  a mark  of 
elision  subscribed,  as  at  the  end  of  f^ST  ( dis ) region.  But, 
if  two  or  more  consonants  meet  together,  without  the  inter- 
vention of  any  vowel  in  the  pronunciation,  they  should  coalesce 
and  become  one  compound  character.  Such  compounds  are 
formed  in  various  ways  ; either  by  placing  the  body  of  the 
subsequent  consonant  under  the  first ; by  blending  them  to- 
gether, in  some  particular  instances  ; or,  most  commonly,  by 
arranging  them  in  their  usual  order,  yet  so  that  their  bodies 
as  well  as  heads  may  be  in  contact,  the  perpendicular  stroke 
being  omitted  in  every  letter,  that  when  used  alone  requires 
it,  except  in  the  last ; so,  ch  kl,  ^ ddh,  tsny  : some 

consonants,  however,  retain  the  upright  stroke  though  another 
be  subjoined  ; as  kky : and,  in  a few  of  the  compounds, 

little  or  no  resemblance  appears  to  the  simple  letters  ; as  in 
Sjj?iy,  ksh  : and,  the  letter  T when  immediately  following 
a consonant  takes  a peculiar  form  beneath  it,  as  sh  hr,  dr ; 

but,  when  in  the  middle  of  a word  it  is  immediately  followed 

r r 

by  a consonant,  it  is  placed  above  in  the  shape  as  rk, 

•S 

rg  ; and  this  letter  is  in  grammars  generally  called  ITfi  (jeyh 
or  repha). 

To  denote  such  Arabic  or  Persian  letters  as  have  no  exact 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


15 


correspondents  in  the  Nagari  alphabet,  the  following  characters, 
being  the  letters  which  approach  nearest  in  pronunciation,  are 
commonly  used  in  writing  this  language  ; and,  though  not  the 
practice  of  the  people  of  India,  points  may  be  adopted  beneath 
the  letters  in  such  cases  to  shew  the  extraordinary  use  made  of 
them  : thus. 


for  ^ 

for 

b 

— Z 

3T 

— 

fc 

<of 

— t 

3T 

• 

— 

t 

3T 

j 

3T 

♦ 

— 

t 

3T 

— J 

• 

— 

3T 

A 

— 

o 

— U° 

T 
♦ • 

(fina 

0 Ji  {aljf-i-maksura) 

3T 



5T 

for 

* ( tanwin ) 

By  some  European  authors,  however,  whose  opinions  com- 
mand great  respect,  and  whose  practice  ought  to  be  known,  the 
following  characters  have  been  preferred  to  some  of  those  before 
given,  and  used  in  many  valuable  works  published  by  them : 
thus, 

for  Is  ^ j ±s\  ^ 

but  such  distinctions  are  never  found  in  the  manuscripts  of 
the  natives. 


1 6 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


A single  stroke  thus  1 is  used  at  the  end  of  a hemistich > 
and  a double  one  thus  T(  at  the  end  of  a distich,  as  well  as  on 
other  occasions,  to  mark  the  divisions  in  composition. 


CHAPTER  II. 

On  Pronunciation. 

^ a.  According  to  the  orthography  of  the  Arabs,  initial 
alif  (!)  has  no  sound  but  that  of  its  accompanying  vowel, 
which,  in  this  case,  is  fat’ha  ('') ; and,  as  pronounced  in 
Hindustan,  it  resembles  the  English  u in  up,  fun,  or  the 
French  e in  le. 

T 3TT  a,  like  a in  all,  or  aw  in  bawl;  being  the  foregoing 
letter  prolonged  in  sound. 

\ i,  as  i in  fin , being  the  power  of  the  vowel  kasr  (_) 

£ 

merely  in  the  Arabic  character. 

-\  ^ t,  as  ee  in  peer;  being  the  last  doubled  in  sound. 

\ u,  like  oo  in  wool , or  as  u in  pull,  full ; being  the  power 
of  the  Arabic  vowel  zamm  (')  simply. 

y ^ u,  as  the  last  prolonged  in  utterance;  or,  as  oo  in  cool, 
fool 

^ e,  as  ai  in  pair  or  a in  fate.  This  is  the  sound  of 
yd-i-maj'  hul,  apparently  so  termed  because  not  known  in 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


17 


the  Arabic ; and  though  of  frequent  occurrence  in  the 
Persian  language,  it  has  no  peculiar  mark  or  character 
to  distinguish  it. 

^ ^ ai,  like  i in  dire , bite,  or  ei  in  height ; being,  in 
Arabic,  a compound  of fat'ha  and  ye  quiescent. 

o,  as  o in  bone  ; being  the  power  of  waw-i-majhul,  so 
termed  because  unknown  in  Arabic  ; and,  though  of  fre- 
quent occurrence  in  the  Persian  language,  it  has  no  distinc- 
tive character  or  mark  in  the  Persi-Arabic  orthography, 
i 3ft  au,  like  the  German  au,  or  the  English  ou  in  our  ; 
being,  in  Arabic,  a compound  of fat'ha  and  wao  quiescent, 
b,  as  the  English  b. 

H bh,  as  b with  an  aspiration,  sensibly  expressed,  yet 
closely  as  one  individual  letter. 

<—>  p,  as  the  English  p. 

Cfi  ph,  as  p with  an  aspiration,  sensibly  though  closely 
expressed  as  one  letter  only. 

rf  t,  as  in  tube  nearly ; being  uttered  softly  by  protrud- 
ing the  tip  of  the  tongue  between  the  teeth. 
j?  th,  like  the  last,  sensibly  aspirated,  but  as  one  letter 
only. 

<JL>  t,  as  t uttered  by  reverting  the  point  of  the  tongue  on 

n 


16 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


the  palate,  and  sounding  the  letter  up  in  the  head.  This 
t and  the  d following  are  pronounced  more  harshly,  or  with 
the  tip  of  the  tongue  higher  on  the  palate  than  the  English 
letters  of  these  forms  ; whilst  the  (rT)  and  j (^)  require 
a softer  enunciation,  more  on  the  teeth,  or  rather  between 
them. 

K - . 

•f1  6 th,  as  t with  an  aspiration,  sensibly  but  closely  ex- 
pressed as  one  letter. 

as  s in  sin  by  the  Indians ; but,  by  the  Arabs  more 
like  th  in  this. 

E 3T  j,  as  j in  judge. 

5T  jh,  as  j with  an  aspiration  sensibly  uttered  together. 

<i  ch,  as  ch  in  church. 

chh,  as  ch  with  an  aspiration  sensibly  expressed  to- 
gether. 

chh,  variously  pronounced  and  denoted  as  chh,  kh,  or 

ksh. 

^ h,  as  h forcibly  expressed. 

£ ?cT  kh,  a peculiar  guttural  sound  formed  with  a slight 
tremulous  motion  of  the  throat,  like  the  Scottish  gh  or  the 
German  ch. 

j (T  d,  as  d in  dew  nearly  ; being  softly  uttered  by  protrud- 
ing the  tip  of  the  tongue  between  the  teeth. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


19 


3J  dh,  as  d aspirated. 

j Zs  d,  as  d in  dull  nearly  ; but,  this  letter,  like  the  t pre- 
ceding, must  be  uttered  by  striking  the  tip  of  the  tongue 
far  back  towards  the  palate. 

aj  T dh,  as  the  last,  aspirated. 

j 3T  z,  like  z in  zeal  by  the  Indians;  but,  by  the  Arabs, 
as  dh. 

j ^ r,  as  r fully  sounded  with  the  tongue  vibrating  on  the 
palate ; or,  as  in  the  French  amour. 

j 2"  r,  as  r pronounced  with  the  point  of  the  tongue  reverted 
on  the  palate. 

ij  7f  rh,  as  the  last,  aspirated. 

j 5T  *,  as  z in  zeal. 

j 3T  zh,  as  s in  the  English  word,  pleasure  : or,  as  the 
French  j in  jour,  & c. 

u*  U s,  as  s in  sin. 

^ SJ  sh , as  sh  in  shine. 

u*  as  s in  sin  by  the  Indians  ; but,  by  the  Arabs,  more 

forcibly  with  a mixture  of  w. 

yi  31  2,  as  z in  zeal  by  the  Indians ; but,  by  the  Arabs, 
with  a mixture  of  w. 

b FT  t,  as  t in  tub  nearly  by  the  Indians  ; but,  by  the  Arabs, 
rather  as  tw. 


d 2 


20 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


b ZfT  2,  as  z in  zeal  by  the  Indians  ; but,  by  the  Arabs,  ra- 
ther as  thw. 

a,  this  letter,  with  the  Arabs,  is  a guttural  consonant 
of  peculiar  utterance;  by  the  Indians,  however,  it  is  often 
but  very  slightly  if  at  all  pronounced ; and,  the  mere 
vowel  used  with  it  is  noted,  in  the  Nagari  character,  when 
it  exists  at  the  beginning  of  a syllable  ; so,  in  that  charac- 
ter, for  3?  may  be  adopted  ; for  c,  T ; for  3”  *. 

^ ^ gh>  as  g uttered  in  a peculiar  manner  deeply  from  the 
throat,  much  like  the  Northumbrian  r ; or,  as  the  sound 
gha,  gha,  gha,  formed  in  gargling. 

- as  f in  Jin. 

J k,  as  h uttered  with  the  root  of  the  tongue  pressed  back 
on  the  throat,  so  as  to  check  the  voice  gently  and  to  occa- 
sion a clinking  sound  ; or,  as  the  guggling  of  water  from  a 
narrow-necked  bottle. 


* In  the  Roman  characters,  following  the  practice  of  Meninsky,  the 
letter  ^ when  initial  in  a syllable  is  here  represented  by  a small  form 
of  itself  written  over  its  subsequent  vowel ; and,  when  in  the  middle 
or  at  the  end  of  a syllable,  by  the  same  mark  placed  after  the  vowel 
which  goes  before  in  pronunciation  ; so,  Jac  akl,  max . 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


21 


Cj  A,  as  A'  in  king. 

^ ^ kh,  as  A with  an  aspiration  sensibly  expressed. 

^ Sf  kh,  variously  pronounced  and  denoted  as  kh  or  sh. 

3 g,  as  g in  give. 

•S  gh>  as  the  last  with  an  aspiration. 

J /,  as  the  English  l. 

I*  ^ m,  as  the  English  m. 

y ^ as  the  English  n. 

u or  u * n>  a nasa^  soun<^  merely,  like  that  of  the  French  in 
sans,  bon.  By  this  character  any  nasal,  when  silent,  may 
be  represented. 

^ or  ^ 3-  rz  or  ng,  like  the  nasal  last  noted  ; or,  as  ng  in 
king.  This  and  the  two  next  following  letters  are  the  na- 
sals, according  to  the  Indian  orthography,  before  the  con- 
sonants of  their  respective  classes ; but  in  writing  the  Hin- 
dustani, they  are  generally  denoted  by  the  characters  last 
described,  and  pronounced  as  such. 

^ or  ^ 3f  n or  ny}  uttered  nearly  as  the  last  preceding ; or, 
more  properly,  by  pressing  the  whole  breadth  of  the  tongue 
into  the  hollow  of  the  palate,  the  tip  turned  downwards, 
and  by  forcing  the  sound  through  the  nose  with  the  mouth 
open  : something  like  gn  in  the  French  digne. 


22 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


U or  07  n,  as  the  preceding  nasals,  sounded  with  the  point 
of  the  tongue  reverted  to  the  palate. 
j ^ v or  w,  as  v or  w in  English  ; or  rather  a sound  between 
them  : in  the  Arabic  characters,  however,  this  letter  sub- 
sequent to  fat'ha,  becomes  au  ; to  zamm,  u ; and,  when 
maj'hul,  it  is  sounded  o,  as  before  noticed.  But,  in  some 
Persian  words,  } ( wao ) though  written  is  omitted  in  pro- 
nunciation, a slight  sound  of  zamm  (')  only  being  imparted 
by  it  j as,  in  ( khwab ) sleep,  (khush)  pleasant. 

9 O 

When  thus  used,  it  is  called  <&•***  ( waw-i-ma * dula ) the 

passed  hy  wao  ; and,  may  in  the  Nagarl  and  Roman  charac- 
ters be  distinguished  by  points  underneath,  as  ^ w or  J u. 
> ^ h,  as  h in  the  English  horse , house  : when  final,  how- 
ever, in  Indian  and  Persian  words,  this  letter  is  sometimes 

but  very  slightly  if  at  all  sounded,  being  then  termed 

«.  * ... 

( hd-i-mukhtafi ')  concealed  he,  in  Arabic ; in 

which  case,  it  may  be  denoted  by  : ( visarga ) in  the  Nagari 
character,  and  may  be  omitted  in  the  Roman, 
o yy  as  y in  the  English  yoke,  your ; in  the  Arabic  cha- 
racters, however,  this  letter  becomes,  together  with  the  pre- 
ceding vowel,  if  fat'ha,  ai ; if  kasr,  i ; and,  if  it  is  may  hill, 
it  is  sounded  e,  as  noticed  above.  WRen,  moreover,  in 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


23 


some  Arabic  words,  a ye  final  is  preceded  by  fat'ha,  it  is 
then  called  i_J.ll  ( alif-i-maksura ) abbreviated  or  re- 

stricted alif ; and,  being  pronounced  as  alif,  it  may  be 
denoted  in  the  Nagari  and  Roman  characters  thus,  T a,  and 

sounded  as  these  letters  ; so  n3fT<?)T  ( tadla ) ; but 

♦ " 

when  joined  in  pronunciation  to  a following  word,  it  has 

X 

the  power  of  fat' ha  only,  as  ^x.  ( ala-s-sabah ). 

\ ^*1  an,  ) 

~ fas  the  respective  vowels  with  the  sound  of  u (?f) 
in,  > 

* ~ i superadded. 

* un,  1 

We  may  further  remark  that,  in  certain  Arabic  words,  1 (alif') 
is  sounded  though  not  written  ; arid,  in  some  instances,  it  is 
represented  by  another  letter ; but,  in  such  caSes,  the  actual 
sound  had  best  be  attended  to  in  the  Nagari  and  Roman  cha- 
racters: so,  (alldh)  god,  ^Tc^TrT  (salat)  prayer. 


CHAPTER  III. 

On  the  Noun. 

o 

1.  The  Arabic  term  name , noun,  is  applied  by  the 

Muhammadans  not  only  to  nouns  substantive , nouns  adjective . 


.TCflP 

- ’s;-. 

. v - 


24 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


l 


*rm- 

fes?, 


and  nouns  of  number,  but  to  the  pronouns  as  well  as  to  the 
past  and  present  participles : for  Europeans,  however,  the 
divisions  and  terms  of  grammar,  to  which  they  are  accustomed, 
may  prove  most  convenient,  and  will  therefore  be  here  generally 
adopted;  but,  the  grammatical  terms,  borrowed  from  the 
Arabic  and  applied  by  the  people  of  India  to  the  dialect  here 
treated  of,  will  be  subjoined  in  the  Appendix. 

2.  Nouns  may  be  divided  into  primitive  and  derivative, 
substantive  and  adjective,  as  well  as  into  masculine  and 
feminine.  Those  which  apparently  proceed  from  no  other 
word  in  the  language,  are  primitive ; but,  on  the  contrary, 
such  as  spring  from  verbs  or  other  nouns  may  be  termed 
derivative.  A noun  subtantive  is  the  name  of  a thing 
whether  real  or  imaginary : an  adjective  is  a word  attributive 
of  some  quality  or  distinction  to  the  substantive  with  which  it 
is  used.  Thus,  a horse , is  a primitive  noun  substantive, 
and,  good,  an  adjective  of  the  same  description  ; but 

c 

speech  is ‘derivative  from  speak,  as  Indian  is  from 

c 

a;.  India. 

3.  With  respect  to  gender,  some  nouns  may  be  discri- 
minated by  the  well-known  sex  of  the  beings  to  which  they 

fi 

are  applied  ; as,  a wife,  a husband:  in  others,  the 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


2ft 


finals  il  (<z)  T ( a ) (an)  frequently  denote  masculines  ; as 

(J)  (in)  cj  (/)  fl  ( sh ) ^ ( n ) do  feminines  : but,  most 
pure  Sanskrit  and  Arabic  nouns  ending  ini  (a),  and  some  of 
the  latter  tongue  terminating  in  A (a)  are  feminine.  As  to  the 
letters  of  the  Persian  alphabet,  the  names  of 


ftr  . 

^ x j i_J  Is  \>j  j j 3 J are  feminine,  and  those  of  the  rest  are,; " 
masculine.  Arabic  verbal  nouns  of  the  form  are  perhaps 

all  feminine,  except  j,)  yd  fleeing  to  God  for  protection,  which 
is  masculine:  and,  sometimes  perhaps  the  Poets,  for  the  sake 
of  the  metre,  may  use  other  words  of  this  form  as  masculines. 

% Rules,  however,  on  the  subject  of  gender  are  extremely 
vague  in  the  Hindustani  ; and,  practice  in  the  language  must 
be  appealed  to  as  the  only  sure  guide  ; for,  though  water , Wl4)> 

clarified  butter , curdled  milk,  y>-  life,  a pearl, 
are  perhaps  the  only  words  terminating  in  fl\  which  are  mas- 
culine, unless  by  nature,  yet  many  ending  in  cj  ( t ) fl  (sh)  or 
u ( n ) are  of  that  gender  and  consequently  exceptions  to  the  < 

^ I foregoing  remarks.  and  a human  being, 

client,  and  fly  and  flfl  a servant,  fl&  an  infidel,  and 

the  like,  are  naturally  of  both  genders,  because  applicable  to 
either  sex  : and  some  words,  such  as  fls  care , Itfe,  mav 
be  used'  indifferently  as  masculines  or  feminines.  Nouns  not 

J * 


/ v . • •••> 


%,■■■■  * if 


5 f A v. 


26 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


?*?#/•  ?W. 
&&&&$• 


here  pointed  out  to  be  feminine,  whether  by  nature  or  form, 
or  which  have  not  terminations  usually  appropriated  to  that 
gender,  may  be  regarded  by  the  learner  as  masculines,  till, 
from  a better  acquaintance  with  the  language,  he  knows  how 
to  discriminate  them  aright. 

4 Feminine  nouns  are  obtained  from  masculines  by  changing 

the  finals  of  the  latter,  if  i\  (a)  T (a)  (an)  or  ^1  (l)  to  ^1  i t) 

^ " /• 

• ^ o 

&>)  (in)  u\  (an)  or  (in)  ; as,  a princess,  from 

c g 

a prince  i a daughter,  from  a son ; ^ j_j>  from 

o/ 

tenth;  a washerwoman,  from  a washerman ; 

o 

a from  a bridegroom  : and,  if  the  last  letter  is  any 

other  vowel  or  a consonant,  the  feminine  is  generally  formed 
• by  the  addition  of  the  above-mentioned  terminations,  or  of 

„ .o  v ' 

'rfr  1 (a)  <J  (m)  Ji  (am)  (pan)  or  ^.1  ( dyan ) ; so,  <Jjs  a doe, 

c 

from  a deer ; l.CU  the  female  of  a tliglj  leader;  a 

G G G 

peahen,  from  ^ a peacock  ; 4W*  from  yH"*  a sweeper  ; ^ Lg' 

o >>  £,  / £ ^ 

the  wife  of  a Lj  shopkeeper;  the  wife  of  a religious  »K«Tf% ' 1 *£c 

^ preceptor.  With  Persian  words,  however,  j is  generally  used 

to  distinguish  the  male,  and  wU  the  female;  as,  y a tiger , 

' TC-.  . ijU jJu  a tigress  ; dd y a bull,  a cow  ; and  the  feminines 

of  Arabic  nouns  are  sometimes  had,  according  to  the  idiom 

y zfrrf),  nrtfi.ffrr-  >ntnrom,T*z-?rr. 

' N ’ — - — \ > 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


2 7 


of  that  language,  by  subjoining  s\  (a)  to  the  masculines  ; so 
a queen,  from  a king. 

5.  In  number,  most  nouns  may  be  either  singular  or  plural. 

The  termination  s\  (a)  orT  (a)  of  masculines  in  the  nominative 
singular  becomes  (e)  in  the  same  case  of  the  plural ; except 
the  words  God,  lyel  a noble  or  nobles,  b£  a poet,  £«  a doctor, 
a prince,  M master,  bb  father,  b, father,  a prince 

melancholy,  by  the  silver  age,  \S?  a beggar,  b-y  a leader , TT*tf] > 
pure,  b'b  liberal,  lita  wise,  produced,  sublime,  which, ’7^3^ 
with  a very  few  more,  chiefly  proper  names  or  adjectives, 
ending  in  T (a),  as  well  as  masculine  nouns  of  all  other  termina- 
tions, are  the  same  in  the  nominatives  of  both  numbers.  Fe- 
minine nouns,  whose  singular  termination  is  ( i ),  assume  ^7 

{an)  for  the  nominative  plural ; and,  to  other  feminines  ( en ) 

c 

is  added  for  the  same  purpose.  So,  ^Jb  cups,  from  alb  ; 

G C G 

boys,  from  l£jl ; ^b Sf  girls,  from  books,  from  t__?b. 

Nouns,  however,  borrowed  from  the  Persian,  are  some- 
times made  plural,  agreeable  to  the  rules  of  that  language,  by 
the  addition  of  J\  t (aw)  b {ha)  or  c^U-  (jat)  to  the  singular  ; 


* This  word  is  sometimes  inflected  ; as,  or  or 

^ G ? S. 

f Words  ending  in  X called  change  that  letter  to 


28 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


* 

G f 

as,  ^.LiL-  cupbearers,  from  pL-  ; l^L  years,  from  JL  ; 

9 

provinces,  from  But  Arabic  nouns,  also,  frequently  as- 

sume, in  the  plural,  the  various  forms  peculiar  to  the  Arabic;  of 

; /•  p ' 

which  the  most  common  are  like  beings,  from  ; 

G s ' s'  9<*p  s' 9 

A^A  news,  from  elements,  from  ,-a^s. ; UU  the  learned. 

from  j*!U  ; bjai-  letters,  from  ki-  ; L-jl  prophets,  from  <_<w  : and,*-  * rA ^ 

K-  sometimes  the  Indian  affix  ^ (on)  is  superadded  to  these 

V«V\ 

1: 

° G G p 

plurals  of  the  Arabs;  as,  instead  of  from  JU-  \\Vt  K' 

>,  an  order.  V -* 

6.  Before  postpositions,  expressed  or  understood,  masculine  ‘S’ t' y\ 
nouns,  ending  in  s\  ( a ) T (a)  or  (an),  generally  convert 

those  finals  to  (e)  ,_?!  (e)  or  (en)  respectively,  in  the 

singular:  but,  the  words  described  in  the  preceding  paragraph 
as  exempt  from  change  in  the  nominative  plural,  remain  also 
uninflected  in  the  singular.  Masculines  of  other  terminations, 
and  all  feminines,  admit  of  no  change  in  the  singular.  The 
inflexions  of  the  plural  are  denoted  by  the  affix  ^A  (on),  except 
the  vocative,  in  which  it  is  usually  A (o) : and,  before  these 
terminations,  masculine  nouns  that  have  converted  A (a)  or  T 

» 

^ C 

(gaf)  before  this  plural  termination  ; as,  ( miindagdn ) from 

G 

( mdnda ) tired,  left. 

HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


29 


(a)  to  ol  (e),  as  well  as  all  feminines,  drop  the  nominative  sign 
til  ( e ) ^7  (an)  or  ( en ),  but  other  masculines  remain  entire. 

° 0 / c b 

So,  li  the  slave's  from  y ti;1^  ^0  the  horse,  ^ j^'b 

yi'om  the  fifth , ^Ij^S-  ,/br  Me  saAe  o/~  God,  on 

/ # <*• 

account  of  the  prince,  in  the  house,  among 

the  slaves,  y on  horses,  ^ before  the  wise, 

u-.b  ”ear  princes,  ^ behind  the  houses, 

G 

^ br*  from  among  the  girls,  ti-ob  ^ ^y'b£  on  the  subject 
of  books. 

Words  of  two  syllables,  moreover,  the  first  of  which  has 
any  short  vowel,  and  the  second  " ( zabar ),  drop  the  latter 
when  any  termination  beginning  with  a vowel  is  affixed  ; so, 

✓ x (//»  ^ x G ✓ 

a ?/ear  becomes  a place  • and,  on  the 

contrary,  nouns  ending  in  I (a)  unchangeable  may  assume  ti 
( y ) before  the  affixes  of  the  plural  ; as  jjU,_s1  O mothers  from  U, 

. - with  medicines  from  lo. 

7.  To  form  the  various  cases,  besides  the  nominative,  in 
which  nouns  may  be  regarded,  postpositions  are  generally  used 
with  them  in  their  inflected  states,  if  capable  of  inflexion,  as* 
before  explained  : thus, 

For  the  genitive,  or  relative  case,  f or  f or  li  of. 

For  the  dative  *1  C if1  u/  or  / &c-  to,  for,  See. 

>or  final  case,  < ^ 

For  the  accusative  J or  £ &c. 


30 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


For  the 
ablative,  or 


initial  or 
instrumental. 


}or  or  ur’! 

> from,  by , with,  &c 

or  J 


locative 


ive,  J 


or 

<u  or  jj  on,  at. 

in,  among. 


Of  these  postpositions  Is  alone  varies  so  as  to  agree  with  the 
noun,  which  denotes  the  issue  or  appendage  of  the  genitive  ; 
and,  in  the  common  construction  of  the  language,  this  noun 
immediately  follows  the  postposition : thus,  before  a masculine 


nominative  singular  li  (ka)  is  used,  as  the  slave's 

horse ; before  a masculine  singular  acted  upon  by  another 
postposition,  or  before  a plural  of  the  same  gender  in  every 
case,  f (/ire),  as  y to  the  slave's  horse,  f 

the  slave's  horses,  or  £ f c to  the  slave's  horses  ; 
and,  before  a feminine  noun  in  every  case  and  number,  f (hi) 
is  adopted,  so  the  slave's  mare,  or  f 

the  slave's  mares. 

The  rest  of  the  postpositions  admit  not  of  change,  and 
are  used  as  £ U-l^  or  f>  W j to  the  prince  or  the  prince ; 


*j  . X 

from  the  prince  ; at  the  door ; ^ j4  in  the 


c ? 

house;  ^ ^ that  space  of  time.  But,  besides  the 

postpositions  above  mentioned,  there  are  many  words  adapted 
to  a similar  purpose  ; and,  as  they  are  Hindi,  Arabic,  or  Persian 
nouns,  governed  by  a simple  postposition  understood,  they 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


31 


require,  according  to  the  gender  of  those  nouns.  f (he)  or  f 
(hi)  before  them,  though  in  some  instances  f (he)  may  be 

9 P 9 

at  times  omitted  ; as^jd  f jd  or yf jj  at  the  door , ^b  ^ 
or  ^b  near  him,  7 f>  ±5**$  or  ^J~\  before  the  horse  : 
and,  two  or  more  of  the  simple  postpositions  even  do  not  un- 
frequently  occur  together  ; so,  ^ f from  on  the  horse, 

P ^ 

rij  ^j-\  he  heat  him,  ^ from  within  the  house. 

8.  The  vocative  may  be  the  same  as  the  nominative,  or  it 
may  be  denoted  by  any  of  the  signs  f ( ai ) f ( e ) ^ (he)  £ (o) 

( °j l)  (a^e)  V.  {y&)  or  (are)  before  the  noun  in  its 
inflected  state,  if  singular  and  capable  of  inflexion  ; but  the 
usual  termination  of  this  case  in  the  plural  is  j\  (o)  as  before 
noticed  : it  may  likewise  be  expressed  by  cjys  (hot)  ^ (re)  or 
(be)  subjoined  to  the  noun  ; but  (are)  becomes  ^jj\  (ari) 
and  ijj  (re)  becomes  (ri)  if  used  with  a feminine  : these  two 
signs,  moreover,  whether  masculine  or  feminine,  are  generally- 
used  in  a disrespectful  or  contemptuous  sense,  and  (be)  as 
well  as  (abe)  are  perhaps  always  so  applied.  Thus,  \!Lj  or 
JLj  f O son ! L5^  ^jt>  O friend ! hola  servant  ! ^j\ 

M O s* 

ufjbj  O woman  ! .jb  or  f\  O friends  ! 

9.  As  great  many  foreign  words  are  adopted  into  the  Hindus- 
tani, so  the  construction  and  prepositions  peculiar  to  other 


32 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


languages  are  sometimes  introduced.  Thus,  to  shew  the 
connexion  between  two  substantives,  or  a substantive  and  its 
following  adjective,  the  Persian  izafat  may  be  used  ; and,  it  is 
denoted,  if  actually  written,  after  a consonant  by  ^ ( zer  or  kasr) 
as  in  pronunciation  it  takes  the  sound  of  that  vowel ; subsequent, 
however,  to  words  ending  in  s ( he ) silent,  called  ha  i-mukhtafl, 
or  in  o {ye),  it  is  generally  signified  by  4 [hamza ) ; but,  when 
1 ( alif ) or  . ( wao ) precedes,  {ye)  must  be  employed  : so, 

- 9 95-  O 

ali)  privy  counsellor  of  the  king,  servant  of 

9 " 

God,  c-j f fyt  good  air.  When,  moreover,  two  Arabic  sub- 
stantives come  together  or  a substantive  is  followed  by  its  adjec- 
tive in  that  language,  the  latter  of  the  two  words  takes  the 
article  Jl  and  they  will  be  united  in  pronunciation  by  the  sign 

9 

wasl,  before  explained,  either  written  or  understood  : as 

1 a seeker  of  knowledge,  a student,  1 to  the  mer- 

ciful God. 

Both  Arabic  and  Persian  prepositions  are,  at  times,  used 
either  with,  or  without,  the  Hindi  postposition  f {ke)  and 
inflect  the  subsequent  noun,  if  it  is  capable  of  inflexion  ; as, 

^ c,  ✓ o — O w 

after  some  days,  jfl\  4 in  the  instant,  U by  God, 

c 

ySs-j  on  the  contrary : and,  izafat  may  precede  the  noun 
though  f>  follow,  or  it  may  be  omitted,  or  even  both  the 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


33 


«.  ? s 

genitive  signs  may  be  dropped  ; as,  je*>.  without  apatron , 

? 9 ? ? ss 

Ijo-  or  besides  God , J\££ ^ without  eating. 

10.  In  declension,  such  of  the  people  of  India  as  follow  the 
system  of  the  Arabs  allow  the  noun,  with  respect  to  cases,  but 
two  variations  from  the  nominative,  calling  the  latter  uUli 
(actor),  the  genitive  {relation),  and  the  dative,  accusative 


and  ablative  (acted,  or  acted  upon) ; yet,  to  conform  to  the 

practice  of  Europeans,  the  declension  of  substantives  may  be  ex- 
hibited as  with  <ob  a grain , a masculine  ending  in  s\  (a),  thus, 


Singular. 

Plural. 

N.  <ub  a grain. 

I \ 

| N.  (Jb  grains. 

G.  ^ ciG  of  a grain 

G‘  J.  J ^ of  grains. 

D.  £ <Jb  to  a grain. 

D.  £ ^yb  to  grains. 

Ac.  £ bb  a grain. 

Ac.  £ ^yb  grains. 

V.  ^ib  f \ 0 grain  ! 

V.  yb^l  O grains  ! 

Ab.  ^e-Jb fromagrain.  \ 

Ab.  ^--^yb  from  grains 

Or  as  li-j  a son,  ending  in  1 (a)  inflectible  and  of  the  masculine 
gender. 


N.  1%  a son. 

G.  J,  K JLj.  of  a son. 
D.  £ to  a son. 


N.  sons. 

G*  °f  sons‘ 

D.  / to  sons. 


F 


34 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Ac. 

£ a son. 

Ac. 

£ sons- 

V. 

^JL j f_$\  0 son  ! 

V. 

ALj  ^5’  0 sons ! 

Ab. 

^ ^JLjJrom  a son. 

Ab. 

^ ^Lj  from  sons. 

In  like 

manner,  nouns  ending  in 

(an),  that  is  all f i mam 

duda  and  nun-i-ghunna,  change  that  termination  to  ^A  (en)  in 
the  inflexion  of  the  singular  and  in  the  nominative  plural,  as 

c o 

^ from  tenth  ; or,  sometimes  to  ,_sl  (e),  as  from 

a trader;  and  they  may  convert  it  to  (on)  andjl  (o), 
if  used,  in  the  oblique  cases  and  vocative  of  the  plural.  Or, 
as  with  lib  a sage , terminating  in  T (a)  unchangeable  and  of 


e masculine  gender. 

N.  lib  a sage. 

N. 

lib  sages. 

G. 

l£  lib  of  a sage. 

G. 

J °f  sages. 

D. 

£ lib  to  a sage. 

D. 

s- 

& v,jlib  to  sages. 

Ac. 

£ lib  a sage. 

Ac. 

s- 

£ ^jlib  sage s. 

V. 

lib  O sage ! 

V. 

s- 

jlib  O sages  ! 

Ab. 

^ lib  from  usage. 

Ab. 

s - 

^lib from  sages 

And,  in  like  manner  are  declined  all  masculine  nouns  end- 
ing in  a consonant ; as^bf  a house , which  remains  the  same  in 
the  singular  throughout,  as  well  as  in  the  nominative  plural, 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


35 


and  assumes  (on),  or  for  the  vocative  (o),  in  the  other 
cases  of  the  latter  number. 


Or, 

as  ^5%  a daughter,  a 

feminine 

noun  terminating  in 

(*)> 

thus, 

Singular. 

Plural. 

N. 

a daughter. 

N. 

0,bicj  daughter's. 

Gc 

$ f b fLr  of  a daughter. 

of  daughters. 

D. 

f fL:  to  a daughter. 

D. 

£ to  daughters. 

Ac. 

f f!.*:  a daughter. 

Ac. 

f daughters. 

V. 

f\  0 daughter  ! 

V. 

f O daughters  ! 

Ab. 

from  a daugh- 

Ab. 

from  daugh- 

ter. 

ters . 

Or, 

as  cub  a word,  a feminine  noun  not  terminating  in 

(~l)> 

thus, 

N. 

cub  a word. 

N. 

b^j'b  words. 

G.  f f li  cub  of  a word. 

G*u/ 

jjyb  of  words. 

D. 

& cub  to  a word. 

D. 

£ t°  words. 

Ac. 

<f  cub  a word. 

Ac. 

£ cfr  words. 

V. 

cub  fr  O word! 

v: 

frf  0 words  ! 

Ab. 

^ uu*b  from  a word. 

Ab. 

fr£from  words. 

Or,  as  a place,  a dissy  1 labick  feminine  noun,  which  in 
the  plural  drops  the  short  vowel  of  the  second  syllable,  thus, 


F 2 


36 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


Singular. 

N.  a place. 

G.  -vV  °f  a place. 

D.  S to  a place. 

Ac.  / a place. 

V.  O place  ! 


Plural. 

N.  ijtfy  places. 

°f  Phces‘ 

o 

D.  t°  places. 

<y 

Ac.  f&yfy  places. 

V.  O places  ! 


/ i c 

Ab.  ^ from  a place . Ab.  ^^yfy  from  places. 

And  masculine  dissy llabicks  of  a similar  form  will,  in  like 
manner,  drop  the  short  vowel  of  the  second  syllable,  as  ex- 
plained at  paragraph  6. 

•j[  Agreeable  to  one  or  other  of  the  above  forms,  between 
which  there  is  in  fact  but  very  little  difference,  all  nouns  will 
Oe  found  to  be  declined:  it  may  be  here  noticed,  however, 
that,  in  the  Dakhani  dialect,  the  termination  (an)  is  fre- 
quently used  for  ^ d (on)  in  the  inflexion  of  the  plural ; and  is 

also  affixed  to  denote  the  nominative,  whether  masculine  or 

c 

feminine,  of  the  same  number;  so,  from  man,  ^jy>- 

the  nominative  plural  of jy>-  a thief  for  things. 

1 1.  The  cardinal  and  aggregate  numbers  often  take  the  plu- 
ral affixes  (on)  or  .1  (o)  whether  followed  by  a postposi- 
tion or  without  any — whether  accompanied  by  a noun  m 
the  nominative  or  in  some  other  case ; but,  this  seems 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


37 


generally  done  to  denote  emphasis  or  plurality  : as, 

y t ✓ O o o 

•j-jb  jd  ^ hundreds , thousands , 

hundreds  of  thousands  of  towns  and  villages  have  been  and 
are  being  inhabited;  or  .i.j  the  two,  both.  In  like 

manner,  and  for  the  same  reason,  the  nouns  of  time  ^y  a year , 

a month, a day,  a watch,  frequently  assume  the  fa 
adjunct  ^d  (on)  ; as  years  (many)  Aove  elapsed; 

for  (many)  months  or  months  ago. 

Adjectives  admit  of  the  same  changes  in  their  finals, 
for  gender  number  and  case,  as  substantives;  but,  if  imme- 
diately followed  by  the  nouns  they  qualify,  which  is  the  ordi- 
nary construction,  they  rarely  assume  in  the  plural  the  termi- 
nations (an)  (on),  which  they  would  take  if  used  alone  or 

0 

after  substantives;  thus,  l£jl  \jf>  a fair  boy,  may  be  declined,  as 


nf )$&**’’** 

' 12.  Ac 


Singular. 

Plural. 

N. 

N. 

JP 

G. 

G 

l£  l/  ^ 

G. 

^ i j£)£  ^ j ? 

D. 

£ JP 

D. 

Ac. 

£jJP 

Ac. 

£ <j£P  'rfjf 

V. 

L 5 ±?j£ 

V. 

££  csj  J 

Ab. 

^ l£P  ±?j£ 

Ab. 

1 /**  j££  '•£>£ 

39 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


\ 

°r  JP  i/  afair  Sirl’ 

as 

Singular. 

Plural. 

N. 

1 — 

N. 

G. 

G‘  ^ 

lt  '■  tl ‘-ijv 

D. 

D. 

f 

V*  - V-: 

w 

Ac 

j} 

Ac. 

/ ie&  YfJ 

• " t «* 

* • 

A 

V. 

V. 

Ab. 

c ^ 

L f*  PP  S rJ? 

Ab. 

1 

C 

lt0  &&P 

> * -N 


f And,  we  may  add,  b/  or  affair,  ^ or  ^ ^j/ 
/rom  the  fair,  ^ a fair  girl,  f\jy-  fff  or  Jfp 

o 

fair  girls,  cr  ±>90*  or  ^.j/ 

o c 

L^cJi^r1  from  fair  girls,  [,/ty  a fair  hoy,  / JP  to 
Jair  hoys.  These  examples  are  intended  to  shew  that  the 
adjective  may  be  used  alone,  or  after  its  substantive  as  well  as 
before  it ; and  that,  when  a feminine  noun  and  its  adjective  come 
together  in  the  plural,  both  may  take  the  plural  sign,  or  it  may 
be  dispensed  with  in  the  adjective,  if  the  substantive  follows, 
which  cannot  in  such  case  exist  without  it;  but  that,  with 
respect  to  masculines  in  the  plural,  the  first  is  generally, 
or  perhaps  universally,  constructed  as  a nominative,  and  the 
last  only  takes  the  affix  (on)  or  j!  (o)  requisite  for  the 
other  cases. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


39 


13.  The  ordinals  of  numbers,  being  in  fact  adjectives,  are 

c ✓ 

invariably  declined  and  used  as  such  ; so,  f the  fourth 

CO  . CO 

time,  jjf  at  the  third  door , the  fifth  son, 

o ✓ 

fL:  -j3'  from  the  sixth  son,  ffj  the  twelfth  daugh- 

ter. These  ordinals,  it  will  be  seen,  are  after  the  fourth 
regular  obtained  by  adding  f)  {wan)  ^ {wen)  or  {w'tn)  to 
the  cardinals,  the  ^ and  j of  which  affixes  may  be  either  together 
or  separately  dropped;  but,  six  makes  or  Q^s^or 

o C / 

sixth,  as  eleven  often  becomes  fytff  eleventh',  and 
the  termination  s\  {a),  vvhere  it  occurs  in  cardinals,  is  some- 
times  changed  to^h,  &c.  for  the  ordinals;  as,  or  ^la^b 

or  f j&f  from  nf  twelve. 

14.  To  denote  the  comparative  and  superlative  degrees,  no 
peculiar  form  of  adjectives  exists  in  the  Hindustani ; but  such 
meanings  are  conveyed  by  the  postpositions  ^ from,  than, 
ljre  among,  ^ from  among,  li>  of,  used  with  the  object 
to  which  comparison  is  made  ; or  by  prefixing  such  words  as 

9 / y.  y, 

much,  \j:  great,  xfj  or  j f more,  or  l!U-3  or  f\  ex- 

tremely, <So.  (for  ) beyond  hounds,  excessively,  Lo  most,  very ; 
a mere  repetition  of  the  positive,  however,  is  sometimes  adopted 
for  this  purpose  : so,  Ua-i  better  or  very  good-, 

^ o p 

good  from  the  good,  better  or  best ; ^jt> 


40  ' A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 

this  is  most  intelligent  among  them  ; \yi  ^ or  t 

y y p 

^ \y.  K this  is  the  greatest ; ^y  ^\y  a very  had  place , 
Persian  comparatives,  too,  ending  in  y {tar)  and  ^yy  ( tarin ) 

C c 

are  introduced,  though  but  rarely  ; as,  yy  better,  ^y^yy  best, 

c 

from  A?  good : and,  the  Arabic  forms,  like  more  unjust,  f'ib 
most  unjust,  from  unjust,  may  occur,  but  are  still  less 
common. 

1$.  The  adjunct  of  similitude  L like,  must,  for  the  same 
reason  as  most  adjectives  ending  in  T (a),  change  its  final  to  agree 
with  the  governing  noun,  if  that  is  any  other  than  a singular 
masculine  in  the  nominative  case.  Following  substantives  or 
pronouns,  it  generally  inflects  them,  if  they  are  liable  to  in- 
flexion ; and  the  postposition  li  may  be  used  before  it,  espe- 
cially when  similar  parts  or  attributes  of  different  persons  or 
things  are  compared  ; but  adjectives  immediately  preceding  are, 
like  it,  made  to  agree  with  the  substantive  to  which  they  have 

C CO  0^0 

reference  : so,  ^ f ^ ^ cr»- 

whose  face  (is)  like  the  moon  ; hair,  like  the  clouds ; eyes,  like 
the  deers  ; yJ\j  mountain-like  nights,  or,  tedious  nights 

9 

C w c o o 

of  sorrow  ; fj>  ^ a good  girl  like  me  ; fj.  fj 

a boy-like  girl ; ^ yj  y a little  wine  ; ^ a black- 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


41 


ish  horse ; ji  c$j  yS  ^ on  a blackish  horse  ; ,Jb 

blackish  mares  ; ^ from  blackish  horses  ; L-d  for 

^ 9 

L UJ  like  this;  Ljj  for  L ^ like  that;  and,  upon  the  same 
principle,  l— -£  and  l— and  L-J  for  L ^ like  what  ? L 
like  which,  L»  U-J  like  this  or  that . 

When  used  with  adjectives,  this  affix  seems  in  some  in- 
stances almost  superfluous,  though  to  certain  words  of  that 

description  it  usually  imports  a degree  of  intensity  ; as, 

9 9 9 

,_/ys  l— o^j  iji  much  love,  or  very  much  love, 

existed  between  those  two  ; ^ cjL  ^ ^Jfr'  y -V-  this  is  indeed 
a very  little  matter ; and,  when  joined  to  pronouns  in  their 

* c ^ 

uninfleeted  state,  it  has  a discriminative  meaning ; so,  Ljj£ 
which  ? what  ? what  sort  of?  LJ}=-  whichever , 1—3  J that , L 
some  one,  certain,  somebody. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

On  the  Pronoun. 

id.  In  the  Hindustani,  as  well  as  in  most  other  languages, 
pronouns  admit  of  changes  for  case  differently  from  nouns  ; the 
declensions,  therefore,  of  those' in  which  such  difference  occurs 
will  be  here  separately  exhibited. 


e 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


■12 


First  Person. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

N.  I. 

N, 

p*  we. 

G.  ySyr*  \j~o  mine,  of  me. 

G.  our,  of  us. 

o'  o 9 

D.  or  / -fs-«  £o  7/ze. 

, 9 p 

D.  ;.  or  *j&  to  us. 

J \ 

c o' 

Ac.  or/^sr0  we. 

~ , / 

Ac. 

or  / p>  w?. 

Ab.  from  me. 

Ab. 

0~  ^from  us. 

Second  Person. 

' 9 

N.  jy  or  y thou. 

N. 

9 

1?  ye- 

G.  ^jjy  1 jJj  thine,  of  thee. 

your,  of  you. 

c 9 O 9 

D,  or  / ^sf  to  thee 

D.  or  / pj  to  you. 

o .»  cp 

Ac.  or / -p/  thee. 

^c-  epr»" 

9 

or  / ^ 3/0M. 

V.  y J O #/iom  l 

V. 

pj'  0 //om  / 

o y 

Ab.  ^ from  thee. 

Ab. 

^ pi'  from  you. 

Third 

Person. 

* \ 

N.  s j he,  she,  it. 

N. 

lJj  they. 

G.  *f  f of  him,  &c. 

G.  f li  of  them. 

9 p 

D.  or  / to  him,  &c. 

C p 9 

D.  or  / f to  them. 

9 9 

Ac.  or  / him,  &c. 

Ac.  ^,-Jl  or  / U1  them. 

9 

Ab.  from  him. 

Ab. 

9 

ls*-  J*  from  them. 

* Or  &c. 


+ or  li  &c.  i 

x / \ 


/though  these  forms  of  declension  rather  be- 
\ long  to  another  dialect,  and  are  not  very 


common. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


43 


And  the  same  word  is  declined  in  like  manner  when  used  demon- 

; 

stratively ; as,  that : in  opposition  to  which  is  adopted  ^ 
this  (person  or  thing),  declined  as  follows, 

Singular.  Plural. 

'these. 


N. 

% 

this. 

N. 

G. 

of  this. 

G. 

D. 

cJ\  or  £ 

to  this. 

D. 

Ac. 

^\°r£ 

ui 

this. 

Ac. 

Ab! 

w 

from  this. 

Ab. 

Jrom  these. 

The  common  or  reflective  Pronoun. 

Singular  and  Plural. 

N.  „ <—>!  self , myself^  thyself ’ &c. 

G G C _ 

G.  <ji\  (Jj\  UA  or  l/  l/  ^ °f  myself,  &c.  my  own,  &c. 


G 

D.  / tjol  or  / <-J7  #o  myself  &c. 

G 

Ac.  / or  £ cJT  myself,  &c. 

G 

Ab  ^ or  ^ <-JT  ^/rom  myself,  & c. 

This  pronoun  is  applicable  to  all  the  three  persons  ; but  it 
must  have  reference,  where  used,  to  the  same  object  as  the 
nominative  case,  expressed  or  understood,  before  the  verb  in 
the  same  member  of  the  sentence ; consequently,  by  it  are  for 
the  most  part  expressed  the  English  myself,  thyself,  himself, 
herself,  ifo  self,  ourselves,  &c.  ; as  well  as  my  own,  thy  own, 


44 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


his  own,  her  own,  our  own,  he.,  which  the  genitive  case  de- 
notes : urjT  moreover,  is  frequently  adopted  in  a plural  sense 
before  postpositions  ; so,  -j**  among  themselves,  he. 


The  Interrogative. 


N. 


Plural. 


N. 

who  P u 

> Inch  P 

what  P 

G-  L,  L 

whose  P 

he. 

or 

fj. 

to  whom 

P he. 

O 

or 

whom  P 

he. 

Ab. 

u 

-•  f>  from  whom  P 

Singular. 

who  P which  P 
what  P 

G.  f ^ u °f  whom  P he. 

D.  L5— ^ or  £ to  whom  P he. 

Ac.  ovfuS  whom  P he. 

Ab.  ~ u-SJromwhotnPh c. 

The  above  may  be  used  absolutely  with  respect  to  persons,  and 

adjectively  with  respect  to  either  persons  or  things  ; as, 

who  P £ j-f-  u-Z  to  which,  or  what,  thing  P but  in  an  absolute 

sense,  not  applied  to  persons,  L£  is  generally  adopted  ; and 

with  the  names  of  inanimate  objects  in  the  uninflected  state 

only  it  may  be  joined  as  an  adjective ; thus,  w*-  Li  what  thing  9 rftsf. 

This  pronoun  may  be  thus  declined, 

Singular  and  Plural. 

N.  and  Ac.  L£  ivhat  P 

G.  f L ^ of  ivhat  * 

D.  £ to  or  for  ivhat 


Ab. 


from  what  Pffi 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


45 


The  Relative  and  Correlative. 


Singular. 

N.  or  j>-  who,  which, 

what. 

°Swhom’ &c- 

v-tr 0I'  * t0  whom' &c- 

%}&.Ac-  ^orS^  whom,  &c. 


Ab.  ^ from  whom, 
he. 

In  correspondence  to  which  is  generally  used  the  correlative 
or  _}-)  Mm  or  Maf,  he,  she,  it,  they,  &c.  declined  thus, 


rfl%.  $>. 

N.  or  j-j  Mis  or  that. 

^ ^ ^ o/  M‘s>  &c- 
fffi, D-  sri or>>  u-i <0  <A">  &c- 

Ac.  ^-5  or  / <Ais  or  Mrf. 


N. 


G. 


Plural. 

or  ,j».  «Mo,  which,  Mi* 


what. 


J.J*, 


of  whom,  &c. 


D.  or  ^ whom,  he. 

£ ^ ivhom,  he. 

from  whom,f^r!f  i 
&c. 


Ac.  ^i^>-  or 
Ab. 


Ab.  if!  from  this,  he. 


N. 


wy  or  _j-s  Mese  or  those.  Ha.  fn. 


N. 


a 

f&lrffMlf  Ac,- 

Ab- 


Indefinites. 


G.  i jf  et°f\  ^ iese ’ ^C‘ 

D.  ^4^  or  y these,  &c. 

these,  &c.  ^.€7,  ^ 

Ab.  ^ ^ from  these,  he. 


" ■ " a 

N.  ^ 

l L5*^ 

, ««, 

G. 

/cri 

, ^ 

M rs 

D.  ^ 

/ ls~^ 

- >> 
© 

s 

? 

Ac.  j*~£ 

L5^  L 5~^ 

jtow 

9 

Ab.  yjg* 

°f 

to 
from 


V* 

a 

ss: 

>*fc 


* 


a 


4 6 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


•[[  These  two  appear  almost  indiscriminate'  in  use,  though 
the  first  is  more  frequently  applied  to  persons,  and  the  latter  to 
things ; by  practice  alone  in  the  language,  however,  the 
difference  of  application  can  be  ascertained.  In  the  plural 

/g  C 

sense,  they  may  become  before  postpositions,  or, 

dropping  the  aspirate  and  nasal,  . 

17-  The  pronouns,  for  the  most  part,  as  exhibited  above, 
have  a singular  termination  ^j\  (e)  and  a plural  one  ( en ) 
which  like  the  postposition  & may  convey  the  meaning  of 

either  a dative  or  an  accusative  case.  To  the  plural  inflexions  of 

^ ^ ' 

^£>  in  the  dative,  accusative  and  ablative 
cases,  ^,\  (on)  may  be  subjoined  ; but,  this  seems  universally 
done  by  way  of  emphasis,  provided  that  no  noun  having  the , 
same  termination  immediately  follows ; and,  the  finals  of 
c/  ijf  c/  ^ J y may  ^e  asP’rated,  when  used  with,  or  with- 

fi  G f 

out,  the  affix  ^ : so,  £ or  £ to  us;  ^ y or  ^ 
or  ^ from  you  ; ^ or  among  those  people  ; 

but,  never  (^rr«  because  the  substantive  necessarily 

takes  the  plural  sign,  which  is  then  inadmissible  in  the  pre- 
ceding demonstrative. 

The  genitive  terminations  1,  ( ra ) \j  (na)  must,  like  the 
postposition  be  made  to  agree  with  the  subsequent  nouns, 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


4 7 


or  those  to  which  they  relate  ; as,  jS  iJyr*  near  my 

house,  L mother,  jj  <_joJ  a£  /jA  om;«  door, 

e$A  Wlt^  h*s  own  eyas:  when,  however,  any  word 
TPt^r  ■'*  *"  " <-/. 

intervenes  between  the  pronoun  and  postposition,  ^ s r*  and  -grsir  5J5.  J*. 

as  vve^  as  (*■?>  and  are  then  used  with  instead  of  the  genitive  cfrlt 

forms;  as,  tsjf  -fs^  of  poor  me.  and  and  ^ 

may,  also,  remain  uninflected  when  separated  from  any  postposi- 

tf^^Hion  ; so,  what  gentleman’s  man  is  it  ? 

V / u0  'Jf  I shall  depart  on  some  day ; ^ ^=>-  ^s>  -ej’ * 

in  some  thing.  As  in  the  nouns,  so  in  the  pronouns  the 
mere  inflexions  are  adopted  with  simple  postpositions;  and 
other  words  used  postpositively  require  an  inflected  masculine, 

* C'  ;?  <NV 

or  a feminine,  genitive:  so,  ^ 4?-*  on  me>  ijrr*  u“'  Ihat, 
near  me,  in  thy  manner,  Ja\~*  (JJ\  for  one's 

o o / 

own  sake.  By  the  poets,  moreover,  occasionally  and  ^vS*  • 5*  - 
are  adopted  in  a possessive  sense,  instead  of  the  regular  geni- 
tives ; as,  >^sr°  my  heart,  jpLc.  .$z?r  thy  love  : and,  they  are  3*  ?W. 


WW- 

Trimf 


3* 


used  with  compound  postpositions  even  ; as,  -ast*  near  me  : 
but  these  are  licenses  seldom,  if  ever,  taken  in  common  dis- 


course. 


16.  Some  of  the  pronouns  admit  of  composition,  and  each 


48 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


* portion  of  the  compound  is  liable  to  inflexion;  thus,  ^ 

~ 9 " 

JfJ  fxW  f&Dtyfwhoever,  y>-  whatever , u^>-  of  whomever, 

frfR  frfW . °f  whichever,  Lr».  whatever,  ^ ^ which  ? (expressive  of 

^ • c<  *'<  f ^ 

many,  various),  -$sr  somewhat,  something  or  other.  *37^^' 


&2?7. 


WK, 

$]<?L 


CHAPTER  V. 

On  the  Verb. 

19.  A verb  is  a word  which  of  itself  may  constitute  a sen- 
tence, and  without  which,  expressed  or  understood,  no  sen- 
tence can  be  complete.  In  the  Hindustani,  the  Arabic  term 

c 

Jm  ( action ) is  commonly  used  to  designate  this  part  of  speech, 
which  admits  of  various  subdivisions. 

The  Imperative  for  the  second  person  singular,  or  The  Root. 

20.  The  imperative  for  the  second  person  singular  i3  in  this 
language  the  most  simple  form  of  the  verb,  or  that  radical 
portion  to  which  some  addition  is  requisite  for  the  construction 
of  the  infinitive,  the  participles  and  the  tenses : it  is,  also,  a 
common  verbal  noun:  thus,  jU  signifies  beat  or  a beating; 
Jjj  speak  or  speech  ; desire,  either  as  a verb  or  noun. 


V.  v * « _ 


*4 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


^9 


The  Infinitive. 

21.  The  infinitive  is  obtained  by  adding  b ( na ) J,  (we)  (J  (ni) 

( nin ) or  ( myan ) to  the  root.  The  termination  Js  (we)  ^ 
is  used  with  certain  verbs  or  with  postpositions ; J (ni)  ^ 

(wJw)  or  ( niyan ) when  a feminine  noun,  singular  or  plural, 

is  the  object  of  the  verb  ; and,  b in  all  other  cases.  So  i>  377.  wr^7. 

W&Qt-  /o  &ea£  or  a heating,  ^ j^U  ow  heating,  or,  a&ow£  £0  5ea£, 
w //e  was  applied  to  beating,  or,  he  began  to  heat ; and, 

(jbj  tlibl  i/ieaA:  a language.  This  form  of  the  verb  is, 
moreover,  in  constant  use  as  a noun  of  action  or  a gerund  ; 
thus,  f tj^  for  drinking,  US'}  S for  the  sake  of  eating.  1 
*77357??.  The  Past  Participle.  <55 

22.  The  past,  being  in  the  order  of  events  antecedent  to 

I # V . 

the  present,  will  be  here  according  to  the  arrangement  of 
oriental  grammarians  first  noticed  ; and,  the  past  participle  is 
formed  by  subjoining  to  therootT  (a)  (e)  ^j\  (I)  (in)  or 

(■ iyan ) according  to  the  gender  and  number  of  the  governing 
noun : as,  for  a masculine  noun,  in  the  singular  ^ and  in  the 
plural  ; for  a feminine  noun,  in  the  singular  and  in 
the  plural  or  spoken,  from  J_jj. 

*[  If  the  root,  however,  ends  in  T (a)  or  (o')  the  letter 
is  inserted  before  a subsequent  T (a)  ; but,  it  may  either  be 


H 


50 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


adopted,  to  facilitate  pronunciation,  or  omitted,  when  followed 
* * ...  - 

<■  by  an  affix  beginning  with  any  other  or  long  vowel : 

thus,  from  3 bring  come  Wl  (Idyd),  ( laye ) or  ( Idee ), 

{layi)  or  tj*i  (Id'i),  &c.  brought ; from  sow , V.j:  (boyd),  iJjJ 
(boye)  or  S ^ ( bo'e ),  o y froyF)  or  (&o’F);  &,c.  sown.  And 
when  in  certain  verbs  (F)  would  be  regularly  followed  by  an 
affix  consisting  of,  or  beginning  with,  (F),  to  form  the 
feminine  of  this  participle,  one  of  these  long  vowels  is  usually 
dropped  ; so,  or  jjo  or  ^lo  from  l»o  given.  Verbal  roots 
of  more  than  one  syllable,  having  any  short  vowel  in  the 
penultimate  and  fat' ha  (")  followed  immediately  by  a con- 
sonant in  the  final  syllable,  drop  the  latter  vowel  before  all 
affixes  beginning  with  a vowel,  as  in  this  form  of  the  verb  and 

O >>  C ° ^ 

in  the  future  tense  : so,  Kj  from  j£i  issue  ; from 

* ' 

understand.  The  very  few  exceptions  to  these  rules  are 

» 

\S  * gone,  from  W ; \J  * done,  made,  from^i;  been,  become, 

9 

from  ; U*  * dead,  from  given,  from  ; and>  U 

taken,  from  . To  this  form  of  the  verb,  moreover,  when 


* The  regular  forms  are,  however,  sometimes  adopted ; but,  most 

c 

especially  bU-  and  L<  when  in  composition  with  \jf  as  will  be  ex- 
plained at  paragraph  30 ; and  \J,  in  other  situations,  though  but  very 
rarely. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE.  51 

9 

used  as  a mere  participle  or  substantively,  lys  become , isv 
frequently  affixed ; as  !ys>  [fc  become  beaten  or  the  beaten  or  the 
slain ; ly>  V.-  given,  the  gift.  ?>WTJ7. 

The  Present  Participle.  - 

23.  The  present  participle  is  obtained  by  the  addition  of 
b ( ta ) <J  (te)  (J  (ti)  ^ (tin)  or  (tiyan)  to  the  root : thus, 

_ ^ o — •* 

with  a masculine  noun,  in  the  singular,  b,L  and,  in  the  plural  ^77^/77. 


rf^ 


tjjU ; with  a feminine  noun,  in  the  singular  fju  and,  in  the 

0 c c 

plural  U or  striking  from  jL.  To  this  participle,  TJJfj 

Witt  when  not  constructed  with  an  auxiliary  verb,  lys  become  may  jCef}, 

nr  9 ° ^ "*  ~ 

~ be  subjoined  in  like  manner  as  to  the  past ; so,  ly>  bJy  speaking;  , 

laughing  or  in  the  act  of  laughing  ; ly>  by*  the  sleeping  V*  p 

or  fallen  asleep. 

The  Past  Conjunctive  Participle. 

24.  But  a very  useful  participle,  in  this  language,  is  either 
the  same  in  form  as  the  root  of  the  verb,  or  is  had  by  affixing 
J\  (e)  * J>  ( ke ) )J  (kar)  J>f  ( karke ) or  ( karkar ) to  the  root ; 

^ (,0  ^ G G C GOG 

so,  Jjy  or  or  or  ffjp  or  or  having 

* With  the  termination  (e),  however,  roots  generally  become 

the  same  in  form  as  the  inflected  past  participle  masculine  singular; 

S-  9 S’  S-  S’ 

so,  from  ys , J> , ^ j , are  ^ys , iJJ , . 


H 2 


>>  ' V 


tf* 


52  A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 

seen,  from  l44J  *o  -see  ; anc*  from  come  i-d  or  &c.  as 

well  as  the  regular  forms  T or  &c.  having  come. 

As  this  participle  is  used  to  express  the  performance  of 

something  previous  to  another  action  which  a subsequent  verb 

declares,  and  serves  to  conjoin  different  members  of  a sentence,  W , 

. . J ~ 

it  is  commonly  termed  past  conjunctive  : from 

its  use,  moreover,  it  is  also  named  the  pluperfect  participle  and 
\ the  participle  of  suspension. 

The  Past  Tenses . 

# 

25.  The  past  indefinite  tense  is  the  same  as  the  simple  past 
participle  before  explained;  so  ^ ^ I (a  male ) spoke,  J,  * 3^*^  fttQ* 

he  or  she  struck,  ^ ice  ( females ) spoke,  \f*  d f 


* The  construction  adopted  here,  though  the  explanation  of  it 
more  properly  belongs  to  the  Syntax,  will  appear  too  singular  to  the 
learner,  not  to  require  immediate  notice.  Before  transitive  verbs, 
in  any  past  tense  of  the  active  voice,  the  affix  (J  is  used  with  the 
nominative,  which,  if  not  the  first  or  second  personal  pronoun,  is 
inflected  before  it,  if  capable  of  inflexion  : but,  the  verb  is  made  to 
agree  with  its  object,  provided  that  this  be,  as  is  most  customary,  in 
the  nominative  case : when,  however,  the  object  is  placed  in  an 
oblique  case,  or  is  not  a word  but  a member  of  a sentence,  the  verb 
is  then  invariably  used  in  the  third  person  masculine  singular.  Thus, 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


53 


£ ?ITTf  ( males  or  females)  struck  : and,  by  the  addition  of  the  auxiliary 


* verbs,  called  J,  Lj  temporal  bonds  or  restrictions,  various 


, ticiple;  as,  1$)'  'ly  (^pr:  1 had  spoken,  ljU  <j  (^r<  * I had  stricken : 


in  the  examples  given  above.  It  seems,  however,  highly  probable 


that  this  (j,  like  the  same  affix  which  denotes  the  instrumental  case 
in  the  cognate  dialects  of  the  Maharattas,  Sikhs,  &c.  deduced  appa- 
rently from  the  OTT  01  *TT  which  is  the  sign  of  the  like  case  in  Sans- 
krit, is  in  tact  a casual  termination  and  should  generally  be  translated 
by  the  English  word  “ by  ”,  as  pointing  out  the  agent  by  whom  any 
thing  has  been  done.  The  singularity  in  the  use  of  here  noticed, 


past  past  is  had  by  subjoining  the  auxiliary  past  to  the  pastpar- 


a past  definite  or  past  present,  by  adding  the  auxiliary  present 

' * ' . 9 

to  the  past  participle;  as,  y thou  hast  spoken , \J^>  d>  y * 


thou  hast  stricken  : a past  future,  by  the  application  of  the 


be  struck  two  blows , ^ cLi\i  yj  fa** 


when  1 heard  this  speech,  <Jj\  <J  ^ or  \Ju  £ JLj  J, 


\ \ r die  women  beat  the  men,  li  J ^ \yyy  J Ld,  the  prince 


✓ O 

asked,  “ what  hast  thou  done  with  that  fruit  ? ” ^ p j ; 


asueu,  wnui  nasi  inou  aone  with  that  fruit?  ^ 

p 

1 have  beaten  two  men,  \^j  \J^  ^ yG  fad  stricken,  and  so  forth,  as 


54 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


am 


ixiliary  future  to  the  past  participle ; as,  or  ijy  s}  he 
may , shall  or  will,  have  spoken  or  he  might,  should  or  would 
^#) / *7 /f/ $7$, speak,  ifys  or  lS^>  ti  * he  or  she  may,  shall  or  will,  have 

* stricken  or  might,  should  or  would  strike  : and  a past  con- 

' ^ ~iiA 

* ditional  or  optative,  by  the  addition  of  the  present  indefinite  ' - • -% 

of  the  verb  ys>  be,  become,  to  the  past  participle,  with  a con- 
ditional or  optative  adverb,  expressed  or  understood,  in  the 
s 1 m e sentence  ; as  by*  j>\  if  I had  spoken,  4 J <^757  5^- 
* would  to  God  he  had  stricken. 


<>  r.. 


ft 


When,  however,  two  or  more  words  come  together,  each 
of  which  might  take  the  nasal  termination  ^ ( n ) or  (an) 

denoting  the  plural  of  a feminine,  that  sign  is  usually  dropped 

/**■  > 

in  all  the  words  but  the  last;  as,  tjf*  <jS)  they 

(females)  may  have  been  stricken. 


WW 


■•ift 


considered  to  he  a mere  expletive  without  meaning,  will  then  no 
longer  exist ; since  the  construction  only  is  idiomatically  inverted,  the 
verb  being  used  in  a passive  form,  like  as  is  common  in  the  Sanskrit, 
as  well  as  in  the  Maharatta,  Panjabi,  Braj  and  othe  Indian  dialects,  with 
the  same  casual  sign  and  under  similar  circumstances  : and  nothing- 
contrary  to  the  general  rules  of  grammar  will  be  found  in  sentences 
where  <_£  occurs,  if  this  notion  of  it  be  adopted ; as,  the  verb 
uniformly  agrees  with  the  nominative  if  any  is  expressed,  or  otherwise 
it  is  used  impersonally  in  the  form  of  third  person  masculine  singular. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


55 


The  Present  Tenses. 

2 6.  The  present  indefinite  tense  is  the  same  as  the  present 
7#  pafticip>le  ; so,  bjU  I strike,  fly  s*  she  speaks,  dk  ^ we 
sir,g’  c r’V'-^  {females)  come>  dr^V  they  {females)  go: 


the  imperfect  or  present  past  tense  is  obtained  by  adding  the 
auxiliary  past  to  the  present  participle  ; as  U'  lijU  1 was 
striking  : the  present  definite  or  present  present,  by  the  addition 
of  the  auxiliary  present  to  the  present  participle  ; as  ft  y 

\ 

thou  art  speaking : and,  the  present  future,  by  subjoining  the 
auxiliary  future  to  the  present  participle;  as  (JV or 

tj€  i ) she  may,  shall  or  will  he  singing. 

By  the  present  indefinite  tense,  moreover,  with  a con- 
‘^Ty^^^fT’ditronal  conjunction  or  adverb  of  wishing  expressed  or  under- 
^ Vjm stood,  the  conditional  or  optative  sense  may  be  expressed  ; as, 


T-  LT 


^ ^~>y~  y J y u bj  f\  if  I could  speak  the  lan-  ^ 

guage  then  1 would  with  pleasure  speak;  y y 'J_C  yS 

o 

[ij  11#  {if)  thou  hadst  not  made  love  to  any  one  then  {thou) 
wouldst  have  done  well.  And  when  several  plural  feminines,  , 

which  would  regularly  end  in  ^y\  (In)  or  fj\  (iyan)  meet 
together,  the  numerical  sign  ^ (n)  or  (an)  may  be  omitted 
in  all  such  words  but  the  last;  as,  gj  they  (females) 

may  he  singing. 


56 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


- ■ 


'.R  TOW.fi  tfste 

%$},? 


Future  Tenses. 

27.  The  Future  indefinite  or  aorist  * is  had  by  affixing  to  * 

the  root,  for  the  first,  second  and  third  persons  singular  ^ v <s- 

-9  v 

^ ( un ) ^j\  (<?)  til  (e)  and  for  the  plural,  in  the  same  order  of  T 

the  persons  ( en ) ^ (o)  ^>\  ( en ) ; so,  from  aU-  love,  come 


f 5 


* This  form  of  the  verb  has,  also,  the  use  of  what  is  called  the 
subjunctive  mood  in  European  languages;  being  adopted  after  such 
words,  whether  expressed  or  understood,  as  subjoin  a secondary 
member  of  a sentence  imply  ing  futurity,  doubt  or  contingency  to  the 
preceding  one  ; so  Sauda  says, 

* y 

ie  u (•*  (f-j* } ^ ^ 

It  was  (our)  wish  that  we  should  go  and  die  there  ; (but)  if  God  wills  not, 

then  what  can  we  do  ? And,  it  is  sometimes  called  the  c .L i*>  on  account  ‘ $ 'i* 


\\U 


T , 

of  its  being  not  unfrequently  adopted  in  a present  as  well  as  in  a future  « < K 


sense ; so  again  Sauda  says, 

C ' 9 


M hfjr*  ^ US*  Ut>  ^ L5*  LS&* 


\ Does  any  but  the  jeweller  know  the  value  of  jewels?  The  intelligent 
if'Z  t % alone  comprehends  the  language  of  my  tongue  : in  the  latter  hemistich 
of  which  example,  this  form  of  the  verb  is  used  as  a present  participle 
even  with  the  present  auxiliary,  and  such  is  very  commonly  the  appli- 
cation of  it  in  poetry. 


i 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


*?  i^V"  y (Jp^r  (j?*  I>  thou,  hr,  wim 
SI**  we,  ye,  they , may,  shall  or  will  love : and,  in  an  indicative 


or  more  absolute  sense,  the  Future  indefinite  is  obtained 


C _ w 


by  a<W'ng  - (ga)  J (gt)  J(gi)  (gin)  or  ^U"  (giyiin),  jj}, 

?>  agreeable  to  the  gender  and  number  of  the  governing  noun, 

J with  the  above-mentioned  affixes  to  the  root ; as,  1&JL 

I (shall  speak,  (_slJy  j.  she  shall  speak,  or  we 

(males  or  females ) shall  speak. 

If  To  such  roots,  however,  as  end  in  T (d)  } (o)  J\  (e)  or  t , %1,  Vm  £■ 

t_d  (T)  the  letter  j may  be  optionally  affixed,  or  not,  before  • ’ ^ ^ 

every  future  termination  beginning  with  ,_d  (e) ; so,  from  T T*  *l}j 
come,  may  be  formed  and  ^7  as  well  as  lf>.7  and  .7 
See. ; and,  on  the  contrary,  certain  verbs  whose  roots  end  in  ^ 

^d  (c)  or  d (o')  may  admit  of  contraction  in  this  tense,  by  either 
dropping  the  final  letters  of  the  roots  or  rejecting  the  initial 
ones  of  the  affixes  ; as  ^ &j*and  op  from 


■%r 


tM 


m, 

m. 


be;  ifo  l&jJ  and  or  tjo  from  give. 


_ _ _ o 
' But  primitive  roots  of  more  than  one  syllable,  having  a short 

vowel  in  the  penultimate  and  fat'ha  in  the  last,  drop  the  latter 

vowel,  as  in  the  past  form,  when  the  signs  of  the  future  are  super- 

^jj^l^j^^added  ; so,  from  pass,  from  glitter.* 

: ^ * The  past  future  and  present  future  have  been  already  described 

under  the  Past  and  Present  tenses. 


I 


58 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


' AS 

•v*X  ,\U 
• ^ v*  \< 

t\i  7>  r 


& 


s3r,3f;£w. 


• * 


•!'  <1 . . 
« 

4r^t  *• 

• » * t * 


^ * 

<}&&■ 


The  Imperative.  t>,  "J 

The  imperative  for  the  second  person  singular  is  the  mere 
root  of  the  verb;  and,  for  the  other  persons,  it  is  the  same  as  ^ 

the  future  indefinite  or  aorist  before  described  ; so,  ^>.  f ‘ TJT 

let  me  order,  1’  bring  (thou),  /JJ  bring  (ye),  _.o  give  not, 

Cj  let  them  make  ready. 

•k-  ,, 

Respectful  or  precative forms  of  the  Future  and  Imperative.  ’ i > 

28.  But,  respectful  or  precative  forms  of  the  future  and 
imperative  are,  moreover,  obtained  by  adding  to  the  root  of  a 
verb  ^1  (iye)  or  y\  ( iyo ) ; or,  if  the  root  ends  in  ,^1  (?)  or  j\  tA>. 

(o),  most  commonly  ^ ( je ) ^ (fye)  yy  ij°)  or  y?r  Uw)  • 
the  terminations  or  or  <_*>•  however,  is  generally  used 

G ^ 

with  t__?T  or  some  other  like  term  of  respect,  ex- 

pressed or  understood,  by  way  of  honour  to  the  person  ad- 

* t l 

dressed  ; and,  it  is  often  adopted  impersonally ; or,  rather, 

« 

perhaps,  it  may  be  understood  in  the  first  person  plural  with  a 
general  meaning,  like  as  that  person  is  often  applied  in  English  ; 

t * 

whilst,  y)  or  yy  or  ^ is  used  with  both  the  second  and  third 
persons  of  either  number,  in  a precative  or  future  meaning, 
and  in  either  a good  or  bad  sense,  as  the  context  may  denote  : 

f ^9 

so,  ~vi  pleased,  sir,  to  ^ 

take  this  fruit  and  to  give  me  some  wealth  ; jh-L  y 

jo  .J  when  one  dies  then  one  escapes  from 


* \ 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


59 


'ffiflW  1*//  trouble  of  the  world;  UjT  pray  take  a trial ; jl>.  ^ ^^ofSj  TfVfZjn, 

'»fw.«rp»-  ,. 

may  my  friend  remain  in  safety ; _j-a,  may  you  be 
happy  ; may  you  die ; may  one  desire , owe  must. 

Before  these  terminations  the  roots  cs^*  f X usually  become 
^ y» : an<^  to  resPectful  form  in  <jJ  &c.,  the  future 

jjj  ’ ' sign  if  is  in  some  instances  subjoined;  as,  l lJ\  you,  sir,  vSfltf  fJJ  * 

, , ; . y.  will  be  pleased  to  remain , or  lL-snJ  cJT  you,  j?’r,  will  be  pleased 
. ^ > to  take. 

Transitive  and  Causal  Verbs.  *. 


IWW 


-it 


♦VT 


.R* 


29.  Transitive  verbs  are  formed  from  intransitives  or  causals 
*» 

from  transitives,  in  many  cases,  by  the  addition  of  T (d)  or 
(wd)  and  sometimes  }\  (o)  to  the  root ; but,  when  these  affixes 
are  adopted,  the  vowel  of  the  primitive  root,  if  long,  is  fre- 
v quently  shortened  before  them  ; so,  UL-  to  burn  (transitively), 

..  t°  cause  to  be  burnt,  from  Ll>.  to  burn  (intransitively)  ;s , 

* 0/  c j,  'T  V «.  , ’*;:<■ 

£&}*!}, to  ra^’  ^'A  to  cause  to  be  called,  from  Ujj  to  speak ; 

«.  o f.  *y  ' ' k * 

^ drown  from  bjo  to  be  drowned ; b^j  to  wet,  to  steep  from 

be  wet : and,  if  the  primitive  root  ends  in  T (a)  ^ (I)  jpp  £ 

^ ^ orj'  (°)i  letter  J is  to  be  inserted  before  the  causal 

signs,  and  the  vowel  of  the  root  is  shortened;  so,  and 


and  yf  occur,  though  but  very  rarely. 

I 2 


V #’ 
w • «• 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


60 


b^  to  feed  or  cause  to  eat  from  bl^  to  eat , bib  and  bljb  to  give  _ ’ ^ 

. | -i^-  ^ s **  '^sfr#n2n  f^^T#n 

^ ~ ^ * yh  or  cause  to  drink  from  1-j  to  drink,  blh  and  b\j!j  to  cause  to 

iv e from  b oj  give,  blbj  and  bhbj  fo  cause  to  wash  from  ^ 

^ # • >Vci  byfcj  to  wash.  In  other  cases,  the  transitive  is  formed  by 


1 , ^lengthening  the  vowel,  or  last  vowel  in  dissyllables,  if  short,  of  \>\ 

^|/^*//»  <•  ^ <.*>  1CTr H&7I 

v ' > A \ the  intransitive  root;  as,  to  dissolve  (transitively)  from  bJuT 

Je  dissolved,  b3l^  /o  ct/^  from  bj£  ie  cm£,  bj^-^.  to  iore 


bj^s-  to  5e  bored,  bj  ^ to  join  from  b^»-  to  be  joined,  UlCi  G&n&zF 
to  wioAe  to  isswe  from  bJib  to  issue:  yet,  when  the  causal^ 
is  affixed,  the  short  vowel  of  the  primitive  remains;  as,  b 


!V. 


to  cawse  to  be  dissolved,  blyb  to  arase  to  6e  cu£,  bU£j  to  caw.se  nr#}#!#!' 


to  be  taken  onf. 

f In  a few  instances,  i (/a)  and  more  rarely  JT  (a/)  is  added 


«'*\rr 


* to  the  primitive  root  to  form  the  causal ; as,  b\/j  or  blb£j 


to  shew  from  Lk^J  to  see,  blly  to  cause  to  bathe  from  bb^J  to  *&)*?; 

\ 1 , o oo  co  c C ^ ^ - ,%•  C * 


A ^ ^ ^ o co  cc  cc^  * *••  r»» 

bathe,  blgC-  or  bl^L*  to  toac^  from  b^-~=  to  /earw,  Ul$2-j  to  seatfffflTjf, 


ir 


^ £7  fi)  *T)  r0 m *°  5I**»  ta  tbrust  in  from  \^Lj  to  enter  : iroir^f^rff,  m 

, which  examples  it  may  be  collected  that  the  vowel  of  the 
original,  if  long,  is  shortened  before  D (la)  but  not  before  jT 
* (al).  And,  a very  small  number  of  causal  verbs  may  seem 
z&p,  irregularly  formed  ; as,  b*=*u  to  sell  from  U£j  to  be  sold,  bj\^=- 

5!>  to  ^et  °°  ^rom  an(*  ^ ^rea^or 


-"N  * 


w 


r» 


(il 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 

from  Uj$>  and  U^  to  be  broken,  Ijy  to  break  from  Up  to  be  i 

protien>  t0 \finish  from  to  be  ended>  but  tliese  npparent 

anomalies  are,  for  the  most  part,  only  slight  variations  in  the 
' ' pronunciation  and  writing  of  a letter,  the  andj  of  most  of  l&fXs 

these  examples  being  alike  the  representative  of  the  same 
Nagarl  letter  2".  With  dissyllabick  roots,  too,  the  short 
vowel  of  the  last  syllable,  if fat' ha,  is  dropped  when  T (a),  but  *)■ 
not  when  \3  (i Wa ) is  affixed  ; so,  l3^->  to  inform,  from 
to  understand,  to  make  to  glitter  from  to  glitter, 

to  move  and  \j \£j~>  to  cause  to  be  moved  from  \^j~:  to  be 


moved,  liLp  to  amuse  from  \ly  to  be  amused. 

Compound  Verbs.  0 

30th.  Compound  verbs  may  be, 

1st.  Nominals,  formed  by  subjoining  a verb,  regularly  con- 
jugated, to  an  uninflected  noun  whether  substantive  or  adjec- 
Ttiwmzi-  tive;  as,  UU  to  dive,  Up  Jff  to  abuse,  U to  purchase,  >?/ 


to  diminish. 


V. 


2dly.  Intensives,  formed  by  adding  some  such  verb,  regu- 
larly conjugated,  as  serves  to  extend  the  sense,  to  the  mere 

root  of  another  verb,  which  conveys  the  primary  meaning  ; _ 

so,  UlSjU  to  kill  downright,  bU-  1/  to  eat  up,  Uo  J'j  to  throw  I Si  l*f] 

, away,  UU  db^  to  cut  off,  \jy  / to  fall  down,  UUjp  to  break 
to  pieces. 


WV\  ^ 


62 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


' c 

3dly.  Potentials,  formed  by  adding  .bi*  to  be  able,  regularly  *H4^  > 
conjugated,  to  the  mere  root  of  another  verb  ; as,  \JL  to 

v * » * ,n£*feT. 

able  to  walk.  w 

; ^ ' 4thly.  Completiv.es,  formed  by  adding  to  be  finished, 
regularly  conjugated,  to  the  mere  root  of  another  verb  ; as 

c P c / 

^ to  have  done  drinking,  to  have  done  eating. 

G 

-\>  5thly.  Inceptives  or  inchoatives,  formed  by  adding  b£i  to 

j,.'.:  come  in  contact,  to  be  applied , regularly  conjugated,  to  the 

v inflected  infinitive  of  a verb;  as  Ld  to  begin  to  learn , i 

begin  1°  read : and  sometimes  bd  precedes  in  posi- 
<?nvsifr;  V tion  ; as  tJU-  id  he  began  to  go.  • •> . #*» 

6thly.  fermissives,  formed  by  adding  bjj  to  give,  to  let, 
regularly  conjugated,  to  the  inflected  infinitive  of  a verb  ; as, 

^1^7,  L>j  iJW  permit  to  go,  L;j  J,T  to  let  come. 

7 thly.  Acquisitives,  formed  by  adding  -lib  to  get,  to  acquire , 
regularly  conjugated,  to  the  inflected  infinitive  of  a verb;  as,  . - 

bb  JT  to  be  allowed  to  come,  bb  J,U-  to  be  allowed  to  go. 

8thly.  Desideratives,  Requisitives  and  Proximatives,  formed 

c 

by  adding  bib-  to  desire,  to  require,  to  need,  regularly  con- 
jugated, to  the  past  participle  of  a verb,  which  remains  un- 
changed in  the  form  of  the  masculine  singular  whatever  the  ^ 

gender  and  number  of  the  governing  noun  may  be;  so 
mwf).  or  ^1=*-  he  or  she  wished  to  die,  was  under  the  necessity  of 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


63 


dying,  or  was  about  to  die  ; ,Jt  taW-  IW  or  a (JjsU-  W 
or  she  wishes  to  go,  or  is  about  to  go  ; bjsU-  J3  to  wish  to  fir&HiFJl. 
write,  to  be  about  to  write  : and  when  used  in  this  construc- 
tion, the  regular  past  forms  \j*  and  bU.  are  preferred  to  the 
more  common,  though  irregular,  \y«  and  L?  as  exemplified  gm71**7* 


? 


above. 

o 

9thly.  Frequentatives,  formed  by  adding  b/  to  do,  to  make, 
regularly  conjugated,  to  the  past  participle  of  a verb,  which 
remains  unchanged  in  the  form  of  the  masculine  singular 

O 

whatever  the  governing  noun  maybe;  as  bb»-  to  be  in  the 

o G ^ 

habit  of  going,  b£b7  to  make  a practice  of  coming,  b^  bj 
he  makes  a practise  of  guarding.  In  this  compound,  too, 
bb-  is  adopted  and  not  \f . — 

o 

lOthly.  Continuatives,  formed  by  adding  bU.  to  go  or  Lib; 
to  remain,  regularly  conjugated,  to  a present  participle,  which 
agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  the  governing  noun  ; so, 

S’ 

'js,  bU-  he  continued  going,  he  went  entirely  away,  ^js>  Jib-  J^ 

^ G G / C CO 

she  continues  weeping,  ^jb  or  Sbj  they 

(males)  continue  reading. 

llthly.  Statistical,  formed  by  adding  a verb,  regularly 
conjugated,  to  a present  participle  used  invariably  in  the  form 
of  the  inflected  masculine  singular  ; as,  ^7  she  comes 


64 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


{in  the  state  of  one)  singing,  ^ bjy  J!}j  he  runs  {in  the  state 
of  one ) weeping. 

12thly.  Reiterative?,  formed  by  using  together  two  verbs, 
regularly  conjugated,  the  latter  of  which  seems  generally  a 
mere  subservient  to  the  first  without  conveying  any  clearly 

o O O CO 

independent  meaning  ; as  UU-Uy  to  converse,  h^ho  to  see. 

Derivative  Verbs. 

31.  Verbs  may  he  derived,  from  both  substantives  and  ad- 
jectives, by  affixing  the  verbal  signs  only  in  some  instances  ; 
but,  more  frequently,  by  shortening  the  vowel  of  the  original, 
if  long,  and  inserting  T (a)  or  hi  (iya. ) before  those  signs  : so, 
b to  widen,  from  wide ; hLJ  to  kick,  from  c^!  a kick; 
liU*  to  abuse,  from  ff  abuse ; hl~>-  to  beat  with  a slipper. 

Passive  Voice  of  a Verb. 

32.  The  passive  sense  of  a verb  is  generally  denoted  by 

adding,  to  its  simple  past  participle,  the  verb  UU-  to  go,  to  be, 
in  such  tense  as  may  be  requisite  ; so,  1 was  stricken, 

• js  h'U.  \jlc  ^ I am  stricken,  &.U  ^ I shall  be  stricken ; 

all  the  parts  of  this  compound,  moreover,  admitting  the  usual 
changes  to  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  governing 
noun. 

33.  The  additions  to  the  root,  as  before  particularly  explain- 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


6b 


ed,  to  form  the  infinitive,  participles  and  indefinite  tenses,  areas 
follows  ; namely,  for  the 

Infinitive  and  Gerund , 


Singular. 

\j  ( na ) ii  ( ne ) <J  ( ni ), 


Plural. 

<J  ( ne ) (nin)  or  ( niydn ): 

Past  Participle  and  Past  Indefinite  Tense, 

T (a)  ^1  (e)  u$\  (7),  ^1  ( e ) (in)  or  ( iyan ); 

Present  Participle  and  Present  Indefinite  Tense, 

^ (^0  ^ (^e)  (te)  (tin)  ox  ( tiyan ): 

Conjunctive  Participle  (sing,  and  plur.), 
the  root,  J ( e ) J (ke)  J (kar)  JJ  (karke)  or  JJ  ( karkar ): 
Future  Indefinite  or  Aorist  Tense  (mas.  and  fern.), 

9 

dt}'  O)  Sr'  (e)  Sr'1  (e)j  (era)  j'  (o)  ^1  (en); 

Future  Indefinite  Tense  (mas.), 

^ (finga)  (ega)  Ifd  Cegd),  J*\  (enge)  Jj  (oge)  jZ\ 

(enge): 

Future  Indefinite  Tense  (fern.), 

(engiydn)  (ogiydn) 

/o 

U1^.'  {engiydn): 

Imperative , 

9 . | 

litf'  (“w)j  the  root,  ^1  (e),  1 ^1  (era)  j!  (o)  ^1  (e«); 

K 


Jjj  (ungi)  Jj\  (egi)  J.A  (egi), 


< 


66 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


m 


... 


Respectful  Future  and  Imperative, 

Singular.  Plural. 

4 (w>  u4  ttye) or  4 (W0)* 

And  the  auxiliaries,  used  in  forming  the  definite  tenses 
verbs,  are  to  denote  the 

Past .* 


of 


1 was. 

. , > 

Va  y thou  wast. 

9 

he  was. 

, s’ 

I am. 

S'  9 

^ y thou  art. 

9 

Xj  he  is. 


we  were, 
j ye  were. 


4 i*' 

V lJj  they  were 


Present.* 


we  are. 

9 

yt>  ye  are. 
^yz  (_fj  they  are. 


Future. 


uP*  or  uiP’  ^ 

9 

y or  i _fy  or  oa  .£>  y thou 

* J j 1 i3 

or  or  he  j 


or  or  ^ we 
or  }y  f>  ye 

s ■ 

&S*  or  or  they 


* These  forms  ar£,  also,  the  substantive  verb,  being  used  absolutely 
to  denote  mere  existence  ; whilst,  the  regular  conjugation  of  y be, 
become,  to  which  root  these  auxiliaries  are  in  common  referred, 
generally  imports  transition  or  change  from  one  state  to  another. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


$&pTl 


6 7 


31 


M <*  / 


Or, 

Singular. 

w / ^ 

lliys  or  ,j-ai  I 
or  Uoy&  or  f'.^y  thou 

\Ty> 

s.  . 9 

or  or  bl;  «y>  he 

Conditional  or  Optative. 


Plural. 

ys-  s. 

or  or  (**  we 

© 

vT- 

£ 

s **  f.  i 

Jp  or  ? ve  * 

Sip 

p 

or  y or  ^yy.y  <_o  they 

c** 

r> 

-j 

Jr 

Co 

Si 


vSp 

cs 


CN 

a> 


b y>  ^ I become. 

P 

Ujj&  y Mow  becomest. 

9 

b'ys  ij  Ae  becomes. 


^yys  j*a>  we  become. 

9 

y>  J ye  become. 
^ they  become. 


Of  these  auxiliaries,  however,  such,  whose  singular  final  is 
T (a),  are  applicable,  as  above  described,  to  the  masculine 
gender  only ; but,  for  the  feminine  gender,  that  termination 
T (a)  must  be  changed  to  J\  (/)  in  the  singular,  and  to  ^,1 
(in)  or  (iyan)  in  the  plural. 

To  form  the  passive  voice  of  a verb,  bU-  to  go  is  used  as  an 
auxiliary  ; and,  it  is  conjugated  as  follows,  for  the  masculine 


gender. 

O 


Imperative  for  the  second  person  singular , or  The  Root. 

' JT1 


V g°- 


K 2 


68 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


ti'mri 

f mn  w 


Infinitive  and  Gerund, 
df  or  liU-  to  go,  going. 
Past  Participle. 


Singular. 

\y&  [f  or  \f  gone. 


Plural. 

> > t s-  ^ 

gj*  or  gone. 


• Present  Participle. 

9 . I *■  9 

UU-  or  b'U.  going.  I gys>  gU-  or  g"U-  going. 

Past  Conjunctive  Participle. 

Singular  and  Plural. 
fiff  or  g W- 

Past  Indefinite  Tense. 

we  went. 

9 

ye  went. 
g.  they  went. 

Pluperfect  or  Past  Past  Tense. 

^ we  were  gone. 

9 

ye  reeve  gone. 


Past  Definite  or  Past  Present  Tense. 


li< 

y thou  wentedst. 

*> 

9 

sj  he  went. 

r ' 

I was  gone. 

r 

> 

y thou  wast  gone. 

.. 

g g/  < 

\ 

9 

he  was  gone. 

l 

■y,  l f 1 am  gone. 

' 's’ 

Ls  y thou  art  gone. 
^ Lf  he  is  gone. 


ijrr>  lsS  we  are  gone. 

s”S>  f. 

ye  are  gone. 

✓ 5/ 

• g-f  gj  they  are  gone . 


\ 

» 

* 

•! 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


69 


Past  Future  Tense. 


Singular. 


dip  ^ 


he 


ir  l\j~n  1 


Plural. 


lx; yjjb  £j  fie 


I may, shall, or 

? 1 

1 

1 

will,  have 

^ fi  we 

thou 

^ gone,  &c. 

S.  * 

(dS  ^ ye  y 

or  might, 

he 

&c.  go. 

d>.)3*  they  j 

Or, 

shall, will,  or 

I 

' 

may  have 

thou 

* gone,  or 

C Ue  y 

might, 

he 

md 

&c.  go. 

will  have 


or  might, 


Past  Conditional  or  Optative  Tense. 


If,  would  to 
CL  God,  I,  &c. 


^ had 


liy.  y y T? 

J or  then 


gone, 


l 


should  have 
gone,  & c. 


S-s, 

r~ 

t. 

V 

-A 

x - 

J &c.  go. 


wau/ 


might, 


If,  would  to 


Present  Indefinite  Tense. 


^ 1 go- 

• • 

* b“U< 

P 

y thou  goest. 

vu- 

P 

- ^ 0-065. 

l 

C^  God,we&c. 

gone, 
^ or  then  we 

U 

o 

should  have 
gone,  See. 


we  go. 


p ye  g°- 

lSj  they  go. 


* With  a conditional  conjunction  or  an  adverb  of  wishing,  this  form 


70 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


$jT ww 


Imperfect  or  Present  Past  Tense. 

Plural. 

ys>  we  were  going. 

9 

ye  were  going. 
<_i>  they  were  going. 
Present  Definite  or  Present  Present  Tense. 

yU-  we  are  going. 

9 

ys>  tiV  y ye  are  going. 


Singular. 

^ I was  going. 

ly 

9 

y thou  wast going. 

9 

i . he  was  going. 

. 

li'U-  I am  going. 

✓ 9 

jb  b'U-  y thou  art  going. 


jb  liU.  ay  he  is  going. 


y (JV  they  are  going. 


Present  Future  Tense. 


s may,  shall 

srV  y we  ( 

9 

y&  tiU-  y thou 

. or  tei7/  fee 

s-  ; 1 

yy  aV  y ye  < 

9 

tijys  li’U-  S)  he 

] going. 

y'V  y?  <%( 

Or, 

c,  * ^ 

’ sAo//,  will. 

t i y y y-  *■ 

\L.y>  uW  y < 

or  wzay 

JU-  y ye.  < 

. * 
l"U-  ^ 

he  going . 

f 

Jkjp  JV  yj  they  , 

Future  Indefinite 

or  Aorist  Tense. 

' may , shall, 

tjjU-  y thou< 

or  m>i7/ 

y ye  < 

9 

gyW  Hj  he 

o 

bo 

> 

(jJ.yV  y>  they  ^ 

may,  shall 
or  willhe 


or  may 
he  going. 


or  will 


go- 


of the  verb,  like  the  tense  immediately  preceding,  is  usually  termed 
the  conditional  or  optative  ; but,  it  may  be  still  equally  well  understood 
as  the  simple  present. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


71 


Future  Indefinite  Tense. 


^ 1 


Singular. 

\ shall,  will 

&,U-  y thoui  or  ™«3/ 

Sj  he  1 go- 


Plural. 


we 
r3  3/e 


Ma//,  w/V/ 
or  ?»«*/ 


7ny 


c;*V  <jr°  ^ me  §0’ 

9 

L.  y go  Mom. 

9 

ij  /e/  /iim  go. 


uftjV  4^  they 

Imperative. 

(jify  ^ let  us  go. 


,U 


f go  3/e. 


^ /e/  them  go. 


Respectful  and  Precative  forms  of  the  Future  and  Imperative. 

you,  sir,  or  your  excellency,  &c.  may,  shall 
or  will  go  ; or,  may  you,  sir,  go ; may 
your  excellency,  & c.  go. 

we  or  one  may,  shall  or  will  go  ; may  we  or 
one  go. 

9 

y thou  mayest,  shalt  or  wilt  go  ; or  mayest 
thou  go. 

9 

Xj  he  may,  shall  or  will  go  ; or,  may  he  go. 

9 

J ye  may,  shall  or  will  go  ; or,  may  ye  go. 
they  may,  shall  or  will  go ; or  may  they  go. 
And  for  the  feminine  gender,  the  singular  masculine  final 
(a)  of  the  infinitive,  the  participles,  the  auxiliaries  and  the 


V- 


72 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


future,  must  be  changed  to  (?)  in  that  number,  and  to 
or  for  the  plural ; but,  where  two  or  more  feminine  plurals 
come  together,  the  numerical  sign  ^ ( n ) or  {an)  is  usually 
omitted  in  all  such  words  but  the  last;  so,  ^ they 
( females ) were  gone. 

Conjugation  of  the  verb  he,  become,  for  the  masculine 
gender. 


Imperative  for  the  second  person  singular,  or  The  Root. 
ys  he,  become. 

Infinitive  and  Gerund. 
or  Uyt>  to  he,  to  become,  becoming. 

Past  Participle. 


Singular. 
IjJb  been,  become. 


Plural. 

* 9 

i>  been,  become. 


Present  Participle. 

lys'Jjfc  or  being,  becoming.  | <jys  being,  becoming. 


Past  Conjunctive  Participle. 

Singular  and  Plural. 

C c S-  9 

ffpt>  or  lJ}*  ^ having  been,  having  become. 

Past  Indefinite  Tense. 

j p we  became. 


f"  ^ 1 became. 

> 1 


y thou  becamedst.  \ ye  became. 


i / 

L he  became. 


I they  became. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


73 


Pluperfect  or  Past  Past  Tense. 

Plural. 

we  had  been  or  be- 


vv>  < 


Singular. 

1 

(j-'O  J had  been  or  be- 

r 

come. 

9 

y thou  hadst  been  or 
become. 

.•*'  J 

9 

ij  he  had  been  or  be- 

come. 

come . 

9 

f ye  had  been  or  be- 
come. 

they  had  been  or 
become. 

Past  Definite  or  Past  Present  Tense. 

V ,jiro  I have  been  or  be-  j ^ we  have  been  or  be 

come. 

^y  y thou  hast  been  or 
become. 


9 9 


Ly\ysJhe  has  been  or  be- 
come. 


come. 

s.  9 ? 

yy  f ye  have  been  or  be- 


come. 

' 9 9 

(j^2*  they  have  been  or 

become. 


%JT!  fX3> 


Past  Future  Tense * 


!*  (y*  I 

9 9 

CS$y  Ujs  J thou 

9 9 

ly>  *j  he 


may,  shall  or 

S-  9 

will,  have 

we  j 

> been,  See. 

S-  S.  f > [ 

sy  ^y  f ye  . 

or  might 

9-  9 

be,  &e. 

^.jyyyuj  they 

may, shall  or 
will,  have 
been,  &c. 
or  might 
be,  & c. 


I 


74 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 
Or, 


Plural. 


I £j»ylb  I 

. ’ * 

1>J  tyb  l»Jb  yj  tllOU 


' shall,  will  or 

c t ; 

may,  have 

( been,  &cj 

s *>  : < 

^3*  f ye 

or  should 

l be,  &lc. 

o * jr 

^^•33*“  ±?3  they  ~ 

shall,  will  or 
may,  have 
been,  8tc. 
or  should 


%K3Ti 


fgvwlrn 


Past  Conditional  or  Optative  Tense. 

If \ would  to 
God, we, h c. 
^ Aad  iee», 


If,  would  to 
God, I, See. 

r *\ 

r* 

J 

^ had  been, 

) . 

J or  then  I 

U 

t 9 

>> 

O 

shouldhave 

9 

V 

been,  &c. 

* s#  ^ 

b 


or  then  we 


should  have 
been,  &c. 


XO  X 


Present  Indefinite  Tense. 


I become. 


C ^ 

> \ f thou  becomest. 

L ; 


he  becomes. 


we  become. 

9 

fi  ye  become, 
they  become. 


* When  a conditional  conjunction  or  an  adverb  of  wishing  accom* 
panies  the  form  of  this  verb,  it  is  generally  called  the  Conditional, 
or  Optative,  and  the  sense  is  very  similar  to  that  of  the  tense  last 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


7o 


Imperfect  or  Present  Past  Tense. 


% 

V 


Singular. 

o 

Iwas  becoming. 


r 

y thou  wast  be- 


coming. 


ls«V<5j 


Plural. 

iv e were  becoming. 

9 

J ye  were  becoming. 
(jrj  they  were  be - 


U y>  I am  becoming. 

* r 

^js,  [>ys  y thou  art  becoming. 

s 9 

js.  tiy  Sj  he  is  becoming. 

Present  Future  Tense 
^ i y&  o I ^ may j shall 

t'y  y thou  V or  will , be 
^j.y>  Ijiyb  ij  he  J becoming. 


coming. 


Sj  he  was  becoming. 

Present  Definite  or  Present  Present  Tense. 

we  are  becoming. 

9 

_y>  ^Jys  y ye  are  becoming. 

s’ 

^ ij-'f*  uij  they  are  becoming. 


Jiys  j*js  w;e  -\may,  shall 

*■  <f  / 

> or  will,  be 


}.b  ^jyb  y 

ukj*  s?j  they ) becoming. 


L O • a>  U fci  • 


Or, 


r'cf-'0  ^ 


.s^a//,  will 
lf»j y>  b'y>  y ^om  ^ or  may, be 
i.  he  3 


becoming. 


y>  t^e  -\  m*7/ 

i/j*  ^ ye  > or  may, be 

/c  a 

lJj  they  ) becoming. 


' 9 

preceding ; so,  ty>  <^rr«  yy  if  I had  been,  \iyt>  ij  y then  he  might  be, 
or,  might  have  been,  &c.  But  it  may  be  still  understood  as  the 
simple  Present. 

L 2 


76 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


*N 


Future  Indefinite  or  Aorist  Tense. 


cT*  * 
yb  fi  tilOU  \ 

9 

*)  he 


Singular. 

(may , shall  or 

will,  he  or 
become,  or 
he  or  be- 
come, &c. 


Plural. 


may, shall  or 
will  he  or 
become,  or 
he  or  be- 
come, kc. 


UjjjA  I 

y thou 
Sj  he 


Future  Indefinite  Tense 
shall  or  will 


he  or  be- 
come. 


we 


shall  or  will 
he  or  be- 
come. 


^ let  me  he,  kc. 

9 

«a>  y he  thou,  kc. 

9 

,_f_. ,ys  4.  let  him  he,  kc. 


Jjj*  y ve 

i/^yvj 

Imperative. 

^ys  let  us  he,  kc. 

£ 9 

jji  f he  ye,  kc. 

^ys>  ^ /e/  Mem  he,  kc. 


or 


Respectful  and  Precat  ive  forms  of  the  Future  and  Imperative. 

;t  foil,  sir,  or  ?/oi/r  excellency,  kc.  may,  shall 

or  mi//,  be  or  become ; or  may  ?/om,  mV, 

&e  or  become ; may  your  excellency,  kc. 

\ 

he  or  become. 

we  or  one  may  or  shall  he  or  become ; or, 
may  we  or  one  be  or  become. 


"Vi 


A. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


77 


sfisi 


, C thou  mayest , shalt  or  wilt  be  or  become  ; or. 


( mayest  thou  be  or  become. 

P 

he  may , shall  or  will,  or  may  he,  be  or  become. 

p 

jj  ye  may,  shall  or  will,  or  may  ye,  be  or  become. 
( they  may,  shall  or  will,  or  may  they,  be  or 
( become. 

34.  Conjugation  of  a regular  intransitive  verb,  exemplified  in 

G 

to  speak. 

Imperative  for  the  second  person  singular,  or  The  Root. 

\ 

speak. 

Infinitive  and  Gerund. 

G G 

or  Up  to  speak,  speaking. 

Past  Participle. 

Singular.  Plural. 

P P 

Ljs  Ujj  or  spoken.  fpt,  fp  or  fip  spoken. 

Present  Participle. 

P o G p G G 

\ps  Up  or  Ujj  speaking.  | Sp>  fip.  or  fiip  speaking. 

Past  Conjunctive  Participle. 

Singular  and  Plural. 

G G G G G G 

ffip  or  fifip  fip  fi^p  fp  jp  having  spoken. 


78 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


Past  Indefinite  Tense. 

Singular.  Plural. 

✓ 

1 spoke.  , we  spoke. 

' i / 

y thou  spokedst.  fy  <j  ^ ye  spoke, 

he  spoke.  \ they  spoke. 

Pluperfect , or  Past  Past  Tense. 

I had  spoken  / we  had  spoken. 

* } > 

W 'iy  ^ y thou  hadst  spoken.  fi  fy  \ f Ve  had  spoken. 

Sj  he  had  spoken.  ' they  had  spoken. 

Past  Definite  or  Past  Present  Tense. 

fy  »£>  we  have  spoken. 

f 

^ fy  j*J  ye  have  spoken 
(j-*  fy  tj)  they  have  spoken. 

Past  Future  Tense. 


I 


^yt>  "iy  ^ I have  spoken. 

' 9 

ty  y thou  hast  spoken. 

' 9 

\jt>  l1^'  he  has  spoken. 


&))*  ^ tlr*  J 

9 

'iy  y thou 

9 

^j.yt  iy  Xj  he 

r 


may,  shall  or 
will,  have 
spoken,  &c. 
or,  might 
speak,  &c. 


we 

\ 

t . 9 

Jj?  p>  Ve 

thev 


may,  shall  or 
will,  have 
) spoken,  &c. 
or,  might 
speak,  &e. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


7.9 


Or, 

Singular. 

, -)  shall,  will  or 

may,  have 
l fpy/jthou\  spoken,  kc. 

or,  should 


shall,  will  or  +2” 

v F 

may,y  have 


l tyb  'ly  he 


speak,  &c. 


Plural. 
tce 

Jrfjxfye  ) sPohen> &c- 

Jp  tf:ey 


Past  Conditional  or  Optative  Tense. 


or,  should 
speak,  &c. 


r.  ' j 

If,  would  to 
God,  I &c. 

\ 

~x 

' yb  \ 

9 

f'  had  spoken, 
f or,  then  1 

' 

f ) 

/ 

w 

’>>  should  have 

L *)- 

spoken,  &c. 

» - 

Present  Indefinite  Tense. 


if,  would  to 

^ God,we&cc. 

had  spoken, 

u or,  then  we 
o 

should  have 
spoken,  &c. 


' I speak. 

^ bL-J  < y thou  speakest. 

" 9 

Sj  he  speaks. 


we  speak. 

O 1 9 

* / |*J  ye  speak . 

^ they  speak. 


* With  a conditional  conjunction  or  an  adverb  of  wishing,  this^. 
form  of  the  verb  is  of  the  same  import,  or  nearly  so,  as  tl^  tense  just 
before  exhibited;  andis  usually  termed  the  Conditional  or  Optative: 


/ 

} 


80 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


Imperfect  or  Present  Past  Tense. 


V < 


Singular. 

Ipr*  I was  speaking. 

P 

p thou  ivast  speaking. 

P 

tj  he  was  speaking. 


Plural. 

ys  we  were  speaking. 

9 

LfW  y 3/e  were  speaking. 

they  were  speaking 


Present  Definite  or  Present  Present  Tense. 


Up  l\rr*  I am  speaking. 

^ o / 

^ Uy  j thou  art  speaking. 

' o P 

Up  Sj  he  is  speaking. 


ps>  ^fp  p*  we  are  speaking. 

o p 

y>  ^fp  j ye  are  speaking. 

✓ o 

^fp  they  are  speaking. 


Present  Future  Tense. 


Uif  % 1 


ijrj  p Uy  p thou  > or  will,  be 

o 9 m 

i_syy»  Up  b.  he  ) speaking. 


o 

may,  shall  \\pjp  ^fp^>  we  ^ may,  shall 

S.  o p w 

if  f ye  k or  Wltl>  he 
the'J  ' sPe°hing. 


Or, 


J-  r O 

&y&  Uy  ^ I > shall,  will 

.or  \ 

Uys  Up  p thou  > or  may,  be 
Up  Up  b}  he  j speaking. 


irS-  o • 

L Sp, p ^fp  p>  we  \ shall , will 

" ys.  Or  f 

Jif  lA  y Ve  > or  ma2/>  he 

/Oi  o 1 

JkfjAp  they  J speaking. 


o " y,  or 

so,  Up  p\  if  I had  spoken  ; Up  p would  to  heaven  that  thou 
hadst  spoken , &c.  But  it  may  be  equally  well  understood  as  the 
simple  Present. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE, 


81 


Future  Indefinite  or  Aorist  Tense. 


Singular. 


may,  shall 
or  will, 
speak  ; or 
speak,  &c. 

Future  Indefinite  Tense. 


Plural. 

may,  shall 
or  will, 

speak  ; or 
hfJ  they\  Sp€apf  &Cj 


^ we 
9 

k ? ye 


\ sfiaH  0j.  WIH} 

\Ll_jj  y thou  v 


ij  he 


s 


speak. 


shall  or  will, 
speak. 


j*jb  we  ~\ 

Jk  ? ye 

^ o 

tjO  they 

Imperative. 

let  us  speak. 

9 

k f speak  ye. 

ikil  'Si  them  speak. 
Respectful  and  Precative  forms  of  the  Future  and 

Imperative. 

you,  sir,  or  your  excellency,  he.  may. 


let  me  speak. 

9 

Jy  y speak  thou. 

9 

fp  Xj  let  him  speak. 


or 


->t 


l 

) 


shall  or  will,  be  pleased  to  speak ; be 
pleased,  sir,  to  speak  ; may  your  excel- 
y lency,  he.  be  pleased  to  speak. 

cJy we  or  one,  shall,  he.  speak;  or,  may  we, 

or  one,  speak. 

M 


82 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


y thou  mayest , shall  or  wilt,  speak,  or, 
mayest  thou  speak. 

P 

sj  he  may,  shall  or  will,  or,  may  he,  speak. 

9 

ye  may,  shall  or  will,  or,  may  ye,  speak, 
tj)  they  may,  shall  or  will,  or,  may  they, 
speak. 

35.  From  the  intransitive  verb  last  conjugated,  a transitive 
or  causal  is  obtained  by  shortening  the  long  vowel  of  the  root 
and  affixing!  (<z)  as  explained  at  paragraph  29  : thus  ^y  be- 

9 

comes  ib. 

Imperative  for  the  second  person  singular,  or  The  Root. 

9 

ib  call. 

Infinitive  and  Gerund. 

P P 

or  \jh  to  call,  calling. 

Past  Participle. 

Singular. 


h*  Ub  or  \jh  called. 


Plural. 

S’  P s.  p t.  p 


or  iji)  called. 


Present  Participle. 

P P P I % 9 P ^ P 

lilj  or  bii  calling.  I or  <J,h  calling. 

Past  Conjunctive  Participle. 

Singular  and  Plural. 

Jjh  or  fih  ijk  h having  called. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


83 


Past  Indefinite  Tense. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

r ✓ 

* d ijr*  I called. 

d j*4>  we  called 

bib  < 

/ 

ti  y thou  calledst. 

bib  < 

9 

ti  j J ye  called. 

9 

. J>  he  called. 

9 

- 4d  they  called. 

Pluperfect  or  Past  Past 

Tense. 

[j  I had  called. 

t j,  pS>  we  had  called. 

. 

If'  bib  < 

d y thou  hadst  called 

U bib  « 

9 

d f ye  had  called. 

1 

-d^fhe  had  called. 

9 

, d they  had  called. 

Past  Definite  or  Past  Present  Tense. 

d I have  called. 

d *&>  we  have  called. 
" \ 

uT5  4 

9 

ti  y thou  hast  called. 

bib  < 

9 

d (J  ye  have  called. 

9 

he  has  called. 

9 

,d  J'  they  have  called. 

Past  Future  Tense. 


\>i{ 


'd^I 

may, shall 
or  will, 

d ^ we 

9 

have  cal- 
led ; or 
might 

yb  bib  ^ 

d y t/lOU 

4 f tye  > 

9 

' 4 l4  he  ^ 

call. 

9 

L ti  they . 

may,  shall 
or  will, 
have  cal- 
led ; or 
might 
call. 


* See  the  note  to  paragraph  25,  for  the  reason  of  this  affix  in  con- 
struction with  the  past  tenses  of  transitive  verbs. 


M 2 


84 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


Or 


Singular. 

Plural. 

* w 

, shall, will 

^ r- 

<4^  1 

S 

<J  we 
••  \ 

O 

58 

1 

. * J 

have  cal- 

9 

b*>  bib  s 

i J y thou 

led  ; or 

lSy>  bib  \ d f ye  < 

should 

9 

4 he 

call,  &c. 

9 

. J c,'  they 

shall,  will 
or  may, 
have  cal- 
led ; or 
should 
call,  &c. 


Past  Conditional  and  Optative  Tense. 


y 

bys  bib 


s/  c.^ 

If,  would  to 
Gorf,  I,  &c. 

I 

^ . 

^ hadcalled; 
then  1,  &c. 

by  bib  < 

j 

o 

ivould  have 

|_S* 

called,  See. 

4 

If,  would  to 
God.we&c. 


^ had  called; 
^ then  we,h c 

5-  ? 

o 

•>>  would  have 
called,  &c. 


Present  Indefinite  Tense. 


•^c  I call. 

r 

, 

* b“lb< 

y thou  callest. 

* 

tj  he  calls. 

. 

ys>  we  call . 

9 

J ye  call. 
lJj  they  call. 


"*  Or,  with  a conditional  conjunction  or  adverb  of  wishing,  ex- 
pressed or  understood,  this  portion  of  the  verb  may  be  used  in  a 
Conditional  or  Optative  sense,  like  the  tense  next  preceding. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


85 


Imperfect  or  Present  Past  Tense. 

Singular.  Plural. 

f h'lb  {jr*  I was  calling.  ^jb  ^ we  were  calling. 

And  for  the  other  persons,  by  changing  the  pronoun. 

Present  Definite  or  Present  Present  Tense. 

li'p5’  ^ 1 am  calling.  \ ^ss t Jib  jt  we  are  calling. 

And  for  the  other  persons,  by  varying  the  pronoun  and 
auxiliary,  as  before  shewn. 

Present  Future  Tense. 


"i  9 ' 

bib  I map,  &e.  be 
calling. 


9 

ij&jj*  iji'k  we  may,  &c.  be 
calling . 


Or, 

. \ \ . i * ‘ 

[>b  I shall,  &c.  be  ^ we  shall,  &c.  be 
calling.  calling. 

And  for  the  rest,  by  varying  the  pronoun  and  auxiliary,  as 
before  exhibited. 

Future  Indefinite  or  Aorist  Tense. 

^.b  ^ I v may,  shall  or 
^b  y thou  [ will,  call; 

^jb  Sj  he  ) or  call,  &c. 


b we  ^ map,  shall,  or 
jL  ye  > will,  call;  or 
\r\jb  ^ they  J caH>  &c. 


s 6 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


Future  Indefinite  Tense. 


Singular. 

9 ' 

&jlb  ^ 1 
lf>.lb  J thou 

*•>  • J 

tfjfb  *,  he 


shall  or  will 
call 


Plural. 
p*  we  \ 


s > > 


J:h  ? ye 

* t 

Jkih  vc>*  they 


s 


shall  or  will 
call. 


Imperative. 

The  same  as  the  Future  Indefinite  or  Aorist,  except  the 

9 9 

second  person  singular,  which  is  the  mere  root ; as,  y lb  call 
thou.  See  the  preceding  conjugation. 


Respectful  and  Precative  forms  of  the  Future  and  Imperative. 


* 9 


or 


iLjlb 


* > 


you , sir,  or  your  excellency , See.  may , shall  or 
will , be  pleased  to  call ; be  pleased,  sir,  to  call; 
may  your  excellency , & c.  be  pleased  to  call. 


S'  9 


. . . we  or  one  may,  shall,  Sec.  call ; map  we  or 
one  call. 

r 9 

y thou  mayest,  shall  or  wilt,  or  mayest  thou, 
call. 

<9 

Xj  .he  may,  shall  or  will,  or  may  he,  call. 

9 

ye  may , shall  or  will,  or  may  ye,  call. 

^ ‘ 4)  they  may,  shall  or  will,  or  may  they,  call. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


87 


Passive  voice  of  the  same  verb,  formed  by  adding  IU-  to  go, 
to  its  past  participle,  as  explained  at  paragraph  32. 

Imperative  for  the  second  person  singular,  or  The  Root. 

9 

U bib  be  called. 


Infinitive  and  Gerund. 


Singular. 

9 

<JU.  or  UU-  to  be  called, 
being  called. 


Plural. 

* 9 

or  IU.  b to  be  called, 
being  called. 


Past  Participle. 


' ? I v 

Uf  lib  been  called.  | ^11  been  called. 

Present  Participle. 

9 1 m % 9 

IU-  111  being  called.  | Jl=-  tflb  being  called. 


Past  Conjunctive  Participle. 

JJL.  or  j)±  JU  V | JJk-  orJA-  A*  A V lA 

having  been  called. 

Past  IndeJinite  Tense. 


c 1 was  called. 

9 

y thou  wast  called. 

9 

sj  he  was  called. 


pji > we  were  called. 

9 

ye  were  called. 

* jj  they  were  called. 


88 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


Pluperfect  or  Past  Past  Tense. 


V \£\>&  ' 


Singular. 

r ^ 

/ had  been 
called. 

P 

y thou  hadst  been 
called. 

P 

sj  he  had  been 
called. 


L's  t*  p 


Plural. 

we  had  been 
called. 

P 

J ye  had  been 
called. 

they  had  been 
called. 


Past  Definite  or  Past  Present  Tense. 


y ^ y ^ 

Ls  lib  I have  been  called. 


Jb  if  1>1>  *j  thou  hast  been 


called. 

' 'r  P P 

yh  LfWb  Sj  he  has  been  called. 


we  have  been  called. 

P's  5.  P 9 

y*  fji)  j J ye havebeen called. 

they  have  been 
called. 


2 * 9 

LSjy*  \f  l^.  y thou 
7 ’ ' 


Past  Future  Tense, 
may , shall 


^j)pb  If  l}f  tj  he 


or  will 
have  been 
called ; or 
might  be 
_ called, he. 


fi  we 

$.  S-s  $■  p P 

ii*  yf?  S>  ^ f ye 

S--  > P 

theiJ 


may,  shall 
or  will 
have  been 

4 

called ; or 
should  be 
called, he. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


»9 


Or, 


Singular 
\Jflh  ^ I 

lilt  Lf  \)JL  y thou 

\J  L;1L  f.  he 


shall,  will 

Plural. 

or  wzaz/ 

(_<y  y&  zee 

have  been 

•A  * 9 9 

/ „ , 
called ; or 

should  be 

Jr  i 9 

J c ailed, kc. 

they 

Past  Conditional  or  Optative  Tense. 


b>l/bL  l 


If,  would 
to  God , 
__  I,  &c. 

A . had  been 

•> 

y ) ^ ca//ez/ ; 

u Mew  7 
o 


b 


*■*>  &c .would 
have  been 
called. 

Present  Indefinite  Tense. 


r* 


s.'  $-  9 


r1' 


Ma//,  tezY/ 
or  may 
have  been 
called;  or 
should  be 
called,  &i  c. 

//i  would 
to  God, 
s-  we,  &c. 

Aazf  teew 
^ called ; 

£ then  we, 
&c  .would 
have  been 
called. 


UU  Wb  , 


' I am  called. 

9 

- 

# A A 

<!  y thou  art  called. 

ciU-  <_£^b< 

9 

fj  he  is  called. 

L 

ys  zee  are  called. 

9 

y ye  are  called. 
lJj  they  are  called 


* With  a conditional  conjunction  or  an  adverb  of  wishing,  expressed 

N 


90 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


Imperfect  or  Present  Past  Tense. 

Plural. 


U bUUb< 


Singular. 

r y 

•-*«  1 was  called. 

w” 

^ y thou  wast  called. 

9 

_ S)  he  was  called. 

Present  Defnite  or  Present  Pres 

9 y 

L>  ^ 1 am  being 
called. 

9 9 

(jrr*  y '-f-  c 

- 11)  .j  thou  art  being 
called. 

ys  (_il=- 

jJ  ije  icere  called. 


gs  bW  IAj  Zj  he  is  being 
called. 


called. 

9 

J ye  are  being 
called. 

L tjj  they  are  being 
called. 


^ybbWll  7 772«2/, 

(jr.yb  bU-  IAj  y 7/foit  mayest, v 

bis-  IAj  ^ may,  J ^ 


Present  Future  Tense. 

* 9 , 

U-3 P siV  u^4  ^ we  may,  - ^ 


<5 

v.r 


(Jb-  fh  j*j'  i/e 

h 

. * ' o 

^j.ys  yU-  ^1'  gj  they  may,J 


or  understood,  this  form  of  the  verb  may  convey  a conditional  or 
optative  sense,  similar  to  the  tense  immediately  preceding. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


91 


Singular. 
bW-  bib  I shall,  kc. 
b'U-  bib  J thou  shalt 

J > 

^ 9 9 

by  bU-  bib  heshall,kc. 


Or, 

Plural. 

^ I > „ * 9 

JL  we  shall, kc. 

^ j v?  9-9  9 IVJ 

SP  iJU-  y ye  shall,  kc.  r gp 

^ they  shall 


Future  Indefinite  or  Aorist  Tense. 


c,'>V  V.^4  b;r*  r 

maj/,  -s^a7/ 

* >> 

Ls'h*  e*  we 

may,  shall 

or  m;///, 

* **  l 

or 

/ * 

uf/f-  bib  y thou 

> be  called ; 

* 5-9  9 

_.U  jj  ?/e 

i be  called ; 

9 9 

or,  be  cal 

or,  be  cal- 

bib a,  Ae 

led,  &c. 

oj  they 

J 

led,  kc. 

-Future  Indefinite  Tense. 


i^V  v>?  ^ 

I ' 

shall,  will 

^ybj jU-  olb  ^ we 

shall,  will 

&jU  bib  y 

thou 

> or  may, be 

y*  * 9 9 

l/jV  ^ y ye 

> or  may, be 

bb^jU-  bib  i. 

he 

J 

called. 

y 4/1 

^ i/j  they  i 

called. 

Imperative. 


(jv*V  U*  ^ he  called. 

9 9 

U-  bib  y ie  thou  called. 


c^lb  y>  let  us  be  called. 

S-  9 9 

uilb  be  ye  called. 


* * s-  y 

t-f/f-  vX»  *)  Id  him  be  called.  \ let  them  be  called. 


N 2 


92 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


Respectful  and  Precative  forms  of  the  Future  and  Imperative. 
' X'  f | youi  S^rs  or>  your  excellency  shall , will, 

) or  may,  he  called ; he  you,  sir,  called ; 
) may  your  excellency,  See.  he  called. 


or 


lt/U  JL 


we  shall,  will,  Sec.  be  called ; may  we  he 
called. 


P 

p thou  shalt,  &c.  or  mayest  thou,  he  called. 

P 

t)  he  may , shall , &c.  or  may  he,  he  called. 

p 

ye  may,  shall,  See.  or  may  ye,  he  called. 
^ they  may,  shall,  &c.  or  may  they  he 
called. 


For  the  feminine  of  this,  as  well  as  of  the  preceding  conju- 
gations, the  singular  masculine  final  T (a)  of  the  infinitive,  the 
participles,  the  auxiliaries  and  the  future,  must  be  changed  to 
(I)  in  that  number,  and  to  (in)  or  (iyan)  in  the  plu- 
ral : when,  however,  two  or  more  words  come  together,  each  of 
which  might  assume  the  feminine  plural  sign  ^ (w)  or  (an), 
as  in  many  of  the  definite  tenses,  whether  active  or  passive, 
that  sign  is  usually  omitted  in  all  such  words  but  the  last ; so, 
they  (females)  had  been ; ffy.y*  u f w€ 
(females)  shall  be  being  called.  See  paragraphs  22,  23,  25,  2b. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


93 


CHAPTER  VI. 

On  Indeclinable  Words. 

Under  which  head  may  be  comprised  the  postpositions  or 
prepositions,  adverbs,  conjunctions  and  interjections. 

36.  Besides  the  simple  postpositions  enumerated  in  para- 
graph 7,  there  are  many  words,  used  in  like  manner,  which, 
being  for  the  most  part  nouns  or  participles  governed  by  a 
simple  postposition  understood,  generally  require  f or 
before  them  ; and  the  most  common  of  those  which  require 
J are 

to,  up  to. 

b near,  at  the  side. 

c 

uUoJjJ  near,  about,  icith. 
near,  with. 

- c 

-jiL-  in  company,  with. 

CO 

in  the  presence,  op- 
posite. 

in  choice,  liking , idea 
or  intention. 


in  front,  before. 


o 

jSj\  within,  in  the  inside, 
g.j  in,  among,  between. 
ys'uor jZ>\>  without, on  the  outside. 

o 

LSff.u  in  the  rear,  behind. 

yf  on  the  top,  above,  upon. 
' l <?&  beneath,  under, 
fj  beneath , under. 

Jo  over,  across,  through. 

- ' < 

Ij-:  besides,  except, 
by  reason,  through. 


.94 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


^ on  account,  for. 


[JsJj  on  account,  for. 
by  reason, 
by  reason. 

9 

by  means. 


^oy-  instead. 


Jaj  in  exchange,  instead, 
fji  equal  to,  opposite  to. 

P 

according  to. 

P 

(Jpba^«  conformable  to. 

at  the  abode , with. 

o 

•^j'bs  into  the  hand. 

And  the  words  most  in  use,  which  take  f before  them,  are 


—if  on  the  side,  towards. 

in  the  manner,  like. 
f\^for  the  sake,  for. 


in  relation,  in  respect. 
ui~ob  on  the  subject. 

c 

by  means,  by. 


The  prepositions,  also,  borrowed  from  the  Persian  or  Arabic, 
and  most  in  use,  are 


j from. 
l _j  (prefixed) 
<—>  (prefixed) 
(separate) 

b with,  | 
y without, 


(prefixed 


i 


or 

' separate). 


y on,  in. 

P 

besides,  without. 


by  reason,  for. 

o 

l>*j  after, 
h or  bj  or  ^ without . 
y in. 

c 

among,  between, 
besides. 

on,  upon,  according  to. 
y from,  on,  concerning. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


95 


J (prefixed)  to,  for. 

with , 

» — J 

^from. 


or  with,  along  with. 


g 

near,  with,  according 
to. 

\ 

d in,  for  {each). 

CS  (prefixed)  like. 

3“.  The  adverbs,  whether  simple  or  compound,  of  most 
frequent  recurrence  in  the  language,  besides  the  words  before 
enumerated  as  postpositions,  many  of  which  may  be  used 
adverbially  also,  are  the  following. 

/G 

or  yf 

G G 

L_fc~  &c.  sometimes. 

G G 

^ &c.  sometime  or 

other. 

ij-9  &.c.  since  when?  how 


720W. 

b fo,  until,  to  the  end. 
or  ^S'j  to,  up  to,  until, 
while,  near  to. 

1 jjy  till,  up  to. 

1^$  to,  as  far  as,  near. 
u->]  presently. 

or  > till  now,  yet. 
t_>l  J 

^ or  when  ? 
or 


L_i3j  U— 


f ////  when  ? how 
long  ? 


^ > ever,  sometime. 

S'*  /G  1 

5 


long  ago  ? 

O O 

_*!  ////  w;/iew  ? 

G 

e;"d  Sec.  never. 

or  i ) 


or 
or 

LL<b-  ^ 


• when. 


>till  when,  until. 


96 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


43  (. 

yorJJor 

*1$ 

or 


whenever, 
perpetually . 
at  the  time  when, 
then. 

> till  then,  so  long. 


here , this  place. 


■\s>  (contract,  of  -1^)  or where  P whither  ? 


here. 

exactly  here. 


or 

or  f hitherto , to  this 

or  i degree. 

eA-  J 

there,  that  place, 
exactly  there, 
where  P 

where , which  place 


wherever. 


somewhere, anywhere. 
43  somewhere  or  other. 

(jnj  wo  where. 

jt>  everywhere. 
j)\  elsewhere. 

c c 

or  j&S\  here,  hither. 

C P 09 

JbCij\  or  jbJ\  there,  thither. 


where,  whither. 

c c 

jZxJ  or there,  thither. 

o 

^ &c.  whence  P 

c c 

ysjj  here  and  there. 

o ^ ^ 

or  £/«/$,  in  this  manner; 

P P 

^ 43  ^ owe  way  or  other. 

P 

or  in  that  manner. 

i))S  \Z<±)»  os  before,  as 
originally. 

o 

exactly  then. 


;V  iJ^cF  wherever,  here  and  \ or  i jF$  ^ ow  9 


there. 

b wherever. 

there,  that  place. 


I J'  * 


fjy^ox^y^  as,  like  as,  when. 

oP  P 

fijyj  oT^fi  so,  in  such  wise, then. 


OF 


y 

as,  whenever. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 

o 

or  Lu-  as  much  as. 

o 

Lj  or  li=J  so  much. 
j+ j f how  often  ? 


97 


(i )Si?  so>  at  that  time. 

9 9 

precisely  the  same. 

9 

as  See.  (for  See.) 
, , somehow  or  other , 

> some  sort  or  other, 
in  any  way. 

c 

exactly  when. 

LjI  thus. 

U-jj  so. 

t 

' — £ how  ? 


&X?  a*?- 


as. 
so. 

y s' 

t- jJ  l— +>-  as  well  as. 

li  L->.  precisely  the  same. 

by  I or  UsjO 

’ > thus  much. 


bl  or  byl  J 

S'  s' 

- 9 C ?*\ 

bl  or  bill 
by^  or  UiJjJ 
b-£  or  Ls-Sl 
b£  or  \z£j 


that  much. 


how  much  ? 


j*i , «=-  as  often, 
jsi  so  often. 

once,  at  last. 

. L 

la,b  or  jb f)  often,  repeatedly, 
ijj b ijj b alternately . 

,Ljjl  frequently. 


f \ once.  ) 

>(and 

jb  ^ twice.) 


so  Oli). 


ui  or  again. 

JUJU  daily. 

by  night, 
^perpetually. 

<*'  ? <S? 

orcy  instantly,  quickly. 

c 

I 

JUil  J instantaneously. 
jyll  J immediately . 

< > - or  quickly. 


o 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


.98  / 


iiy»  during , in  the  pre * 


sence. 


t) 


along  with , with. 


iJj*  4^  gradually. 

on,  over,  neverthe- 

i  J}*  i J)*  1 

less. 

(f~2>\  ^ gently,  softly. 

uy-j  near,  beside. 

c 

J-5  before. 

jJ  successively. 

i^ss.  at  the  heel,  in  the 

rear,  behind. 

f t > separately . 

'■As-  ' As-  3 

c 

nearly,  shortly,  soon- 

J_f\  Cjd)  one  ty  one. 

how?  of  what  hind? 

apart,  separately. 
fS  jd  aside. 

s' 

besides. 


bj  ^ 


besides,  moreover. 


y 

j*-  besides,  except. 
-r'if  nearly,  about. 


o ^ o *\ 
! tV'cl—'  i <v<  1 / 


opposite,  face  to 
iji'  face. 

c 

opposite,  confront- 


l_ cJ>  how? 

i\ys.<  willing  or  not  wil- 


ling. 


> gratuitously . 


> unawapes;  sudden- 

i'fi: ) lv- 
fs 


all  at  once. 


mg. 


c 

^ before,  soon,  rather. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


99 


in  the  first  place, 
rather. 

G p 

in  the  second  place, 

&c. 

at  last,  at  least. 
or j*-T  at  last,  finally. 

C C-O  7 

fi~  at  the  end,  finally. 

G 

JU!I  now,  presently. 

G 0-0 

JxiJb  now,  at  this  moment. 
j*UU  ow  /owg  as,  until, 
fit  today. 

fi  yesterday  or  to- 
morrow, 
jjj  yesterday. 

G 

tomorrow. 

^.T  shortly,  now-a-days. 

G 

aS°  or 

come. 

0 

three  days  ago  or 
£o  come. 

G 

ybwr  (/aj/s  flt"o  or 
come. 


G 

LS^j'  at  the  dawn  of  day, 
early. 

in  the  morning, 
early. 

C/'/’  g | 

o-iy  o- ijfrom  time  to  time. 

G— - G 

o-jj-j  constantly. 

C/  G 

to — Jjl3  Lu-ij  occasionally. 

P 

tjJ  in,  within, 
within. 

j on  Mes  mofe,  near. 
^ ow  //io/  .s/^e,  beyond. 

G 

o/z  both  sides,  across. 

G 

iliys  every  where. 

f 

pfi  Jj'  upside  down. 

G 

<a*j  after,  afterwards. 

9 

much,  very. 

*ol>j  more, 
o-jly  extremely. 

(JU-J  extremely , very. 

L-j  or  enough,  much,  many, 
most,  very. 

G 

ybr  the  most  part. 


o 2 


100 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


*~9  * # 

j,  upon  the  whole. 

tL&\) 

" , in  short,  in  a word. 

o 

c-Jul  »?os£  lihely. 

UU  chiefly,  most  likely. 


jo^S  necessarily,  infal- 
libly. 

fjfl  undoubtedly,  of  ne- 
cessity. 

9 

aj  -f  it  must  be. 

9 

u;*  or  fz  yes. 


yes’ 

yes,  right,  well. 

~ g 

certainly. 

o 

ii  i’w  truth. 

U»-  truly,  really,  by 
God. 


U£Ji=-  really,  truly. 

< — t_2s-  right  or  wrong. 

(^r  or  truly,  in  earnest, 

Jr  v e 

indeed. 


<*G 

L»\  % wo  means,  not  at 
all,  never. 

* c p 

Uikc  absolutely,  not  at 
all. 

or  aj  no,  not. 

.'j  otherwise,  (if)  not 
then. 

L^-v<  not,  do  not. 

•ys]  or  fjn\  nay,  no,  do  not. 
taL«  lest,  God  forbid  l 
joli  perhaps,  possibly. 
ySb  ji  y>  may  be. 
pt>  i j muatf  be,  necessarily . 

G 

^.0,1$  or  may  happen, 

God  send  ! 

fo  unless,  perhaps,  ex- 
cept. 

9 

except,  save. 
lLi>  probably,  doubtless. 
kii  only,  simply. 

G 

ow(y,  merely. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


] o i 


y (emphatick)  do,  in 
fact,  indeed. 
ci'  (affixed) 

1 or  ^ (affixed  or 
alone) 


very , 
exactly. 


c 

Ly*r;  that  is,  namely, 
kf  °ne  might  say,  as  if. 
although, 
always. 

o > always. 


9 

always , eternally . 
eyer. 

£z/ne  or  0^er> 

3/eL 


V 

^0  that,  like  as. 

» v J 

M if  not,  except,  other- 
wise. 

c 

agreeable  to. 

or jf.  other  than,  besides, 
except. 

et  cetera , oyrf  the 
rest. 

* 

It*  for  example. 

*99 

especially,  particu- 
larly. 

* 'C  ^ 

kuJ  o/?ew,  a//  a/  o;/ce. 

*<j 

^ prudently,  reason- 
ably. 


38.  The  conjunctions  most  in  use  are 


or  fi  or  jf  and. 

u#  also,  even,  likewise. 
^ that,  or,  than,  if, 
because. 

or  \f>  that,  when. 
/°r/1  if. 


also,  even,  likewise, 
f.  ov  S,  hat,  yet,  moreover . 

c 

but,  moreover. 

°r  fr)  but,  yet. 

Gi  but,  moreover,  how- 
ever. 


102 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


V. or • 

b\f-  or,  cither , whether, 
ff  either , or,  choose. 

* 'j  or  y ^/zezz. 

^ £/zen,  therefore, 
fi  also,  likewise. 


o 

azzrf  i/*  not,  unless, 
although. 

o o 

whensoever,  al- 
though. 

<tbT  JU-  whereas,  notwith- 
standing, although. 


i'j  alj  or  alj 


(for  yl  _.)  a/zcZ  if. 

39.  And  the  words  commonly  adopted  as  interjections,  be- 
sides the  vocative  signs  mentioned  in  paragraph  8,  are, 

^js  or  alas  ! strange  ! 

alas  ! strange  ! 
alas  ! begone  ! 

^ ! hush! 

u^bfy ! begone  ! 


well  done ! 
bravo  ! 


C 

Lo^e  /zozV ! God  bless 
you ! welcome  ! 

o 

^b.-^  have  a care  ! 
or 


or 


u 


begone  ! 
avaunt ! 


lS  'j  or  lj 

) 

o 

b ,j  or  U. > j<_' 


m;o  / a/as ! 
lachaday ! 


* 9 

or  jJ  avaunt ! begone * 
/o  / /00&  ! there 


now  ! 


utj 


or 


I astonishing ! 


r 


103 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 
CHAPTER  VII. 


On  the  Numerals. 

•40.  The  Cardinal  Numbers,  from  one  to  one  hundred,  with 
the  Indian,  Arabic  and  European  figures  adopted  to  represent 
them,  are  as  follows. 


Figures. 

Figures. 

§■ 

*■>1 

§ 

SS 

1 

I 

14 

IP 

18 

2 

r 

5 

• • • 

15 

1 c 

1M 

3 

r 

16 

n 

4 

r 

* 

> 

17 

|v 

1\9 

5 

e> 

M 

e.  •/ 

18 

1 A 

n 

6 

$ 

* V 

19 

n 

i£ 

7 

V 

V9 

20 

r ♦ 

^0 

8 

A 

t 

C 



21 

r i 

si 

9 

1 

if 

22 

rr 

ss 

J 

10 

I ♦ 

^ o 

23 

rr 

11 

1! 

24 

fr 

12 

lr 

is 

25 

re 

13 

ir 

26 

n 

J 


J v 

U-^f' 


I 

27 

23 

29 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

41 

42 

43 

44 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


Figures. 

i 

§ 

45 

45 

Pc 

8 M 



lH.V' 

46  Pi 

c • 

47 

Fv 

8\9' 

G .*■ 

• • • • • • • • 

48 

t=A 



O 

« 

49 

n 

snj 

u-V'' 

50 

C ♦ 

Mo 



51 

cl 

M ^ 

vP 

52 

cr 

Jft 

53 

cr 

M 

U-+FT 

54 

Cl3 

M8 

<»  ✓ 



G ^1 

u-iry^ 

55 

cc 

MM 



(A. 

. 

tr^r'1 

56 

cl 



G/ 

U-Jl&il 

57 

cv 

M\9 

- . . . . yjt- 

u-~“V 

58 

C A 

Mb 

^ 

yJW 

59 

cT 

Hi 

• •«•••••••  ■£*■»—■*  1 

60 

V 

£° 



61 

li 

O G 



LT^W“ 

62 

ir 

& 

G 

§• 

& 

fej 

63 

64 

65 

66 

67 

68 

69 

70 

71 

72 

73 

74 

73 

76 

77; 

78 

79| 

80 

81 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


Figures. 

*npl 

i 

"N 

*§ 

\ 

82 

Ar 

i . 

"f***,^*“ 

83 

at 

lc'!/ 

84 

Af 

t8 

t 

' -V 

85 

Ac 

tM 

1 ^ 

86 

A1 

CT 

Cn, 

* 

„K  Jit 

• • • • • • • yU 

87 

AV 

t\9 

- 

88 

AA 

tt 

c 

1 st 

/T 

89 

A1] 

tf 

1 ^ 

90 

V 

tfc 

rr. 

^ 

91 

'll 

£<) 

92 

ir 

„ *1 

/T 

w ✓ 

93 

ir 

, •!  •• 

94 

if 

£» 

JVvi 

95 

u 

fM' 

, o 

j nr 

96 

n 

• I 

’ * ^rHr-4 

w CO 

97 

iv 

£\S 

■•«»•••• 

98 

V 

ft 

✓ c 
„ •!  Kf 

99 

11 

ff 

** 

, ;l.  1 

100 

1 * ♦ 

8 o o 

' ^7  . 

r 


106 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


Some  little  variation  from  the  above  may  occur  in  a few 

c ^ o >■  G CP 

instances;  as,  33,  34,  38,  39, 

G ^ C ^ GO 

43,  48,  55,  66,  68, 

82,  91,  ijy\  or  csy]/  92,  93>  &c.  And,  the 

series  after  one  hundred  is  continued  thus,  CJiA  *-•  Cf\  101, 

w X CO  s' 

j->  cjL  721,  ^ y 93S.  When,  however,  the 

word  is  immediately  subsequent  to  another  numeral  or 

other  numerals,  it  may  convey  the  meaning  of  wear  or  about, 
one  more  or  less  than,  such  number  or  numbers  ; as,  ^ 
about  a hundred,  *u)  near  two  hundred  and  two : 

and,  if  a noun  is  used,  it  generally  precedes  the  numeral, 

G 

when  this  sense  is  intended  ; so,  iLf)  about  ten  men ; 

G ^ 

^ t L&\  jO  two  hours  or  so  afterwards.  Instead  of  the 

figures  above  given,  moreover,  Arabic  letters  are  sometimes 
adopted  to  represent  numbers ; and  the  order  of  the  alphabet, 
then  observed,  with  the  quantity  denoted  by  each  letter,  is, 

Oi  ^ 00  — 

OOOO  O O X -3  © © £>■  co  tc  >~ 


jyJS 


i\ 


©OX  © Cji  00  K>  ■ 

COO  OOO  OOOO 

OOO  OOO  OOOO 


eocoo 

©OOO 


Jw *- 


The  intermediate  and  subsequent  numbers  being  denoted  by 
the  composition  of  these  letters ; as  b eleven , } thirty-six , 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


107 


sAi  one  hundred  and  ninety  four,  j_j  two  thousand,  jJ  five 
hundred  thousand,  See. 


41.  The  Ordinals  are, 


1st 

V. 

9 C p 

6th.. 

or 

0 

2d 

UjO  or  LjjO 

O 

7th.. 

Co 

3d 

8th... 



4 th 

O ^ 

9th.. 

5 th 

O 0 

i,Wi 

10th 

And  so  forth,  by  adding  ^ or  or  to  the  cardinals,  as 
before  noticed  at  paragraph  13- 

42.  The  aggregate  or  collective  numbers  are, 

„o 

A four 

A five 


A score.. LS*r?J 

A forty  


A hundred 

A thousand  jf 

c 

A hundred  thousand 
A ten  millions j)J> 


43.  In  a distributive  sense  the  numerals,  whether  cardinals 
or  ordinals,  are  repeated  ; as,  Cf)  <— one  ty  one , 
hy  tens,  every  twelfth.  Proportionals  and  redu- 

plicatives  are  formed  by  adding  or,  more  especially  with 
regard  to  the  folds  or  rows  of  any  material,  or  or  to 
the  modified  forms  of  the  cardinals  as  used  in  composition,  and 

o 

in  some  cases  to  the  unaltered  forms ; so,  single, 
double,  bj-J  treble,  quadruple,  l quintuple,  sex- 

P 2 


108 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


v v 7,  ^ ✓ 

septuple , Li'  octuple,  \~y  ninefold,  Lf^-J  ten- 

fold,  kc.  but  LI  and  I^LI  are  also  used  for  single,  lijO  \ytjj 

o‘  p c O G ^ 

and  Ij’LyJ  for  double,  L-J  and  L^‘  I^J  for  treble,  l^jy>-  and 

c ^ o 

for  quadruple  : and  may  with  the  Persian  numerals 
be  sometimes  adopted  as  an  affix  for  the  same  purpose  } so, 

o o c 

jco-  jO  two  fold,  twice  as  much ; treble  ; qua- 

c,  p o 

druple  ; ninefold ; tenfold : whilst or  aj  may 

be  subjoined  in  a like  meaning  to  the  simple  forms  of  the 
cardinals  as  before  given,  and  in  some  cases  to  the  Persian 
nouns  of  number;  as  y\ p ^ twice  as  much,  a;  ^ three  fold, 

c 

fjj  cl>L  or  seven  fold. 

44.  The  fractional  will,  on  account  of  their  various  names 
and  extraordinary  use,  be  most  easily  comprehended  from  a 
detailed  statement  of  them,  as  applied  to  different  numbers ; thus, 


H 


14- 


or  -VST  orjk 

*V 


c 

. . LjT 


**  ^ 

A i fi or 


ijjj 


If 


2-i- 

2 


H 


a 1 

JT 


9J_ 
° 2 


9 3. 
J4 


H 


, jO  lj«<) 


• i 

• ifi  !** 

o 

• jV  I2-1 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


109 


H 


J-y  lS^"4 


75 

125 

150 

250 

175 

225 


19  4 *••••••••••• 

SO— 



* s 

y4si 


50± 


> yJ  1 yz 
*■  o 

y sy4 

' • o 

y lS 

y jJ4rt 


J~S  J U \ 


! 275 
325 
350 
750 
1250 


• • • y ^ S& 

• • • y utP  V** 

. ^ o 

• y ijr?  L 5^^ 

c 

j\y>  )r> 


1500  Jjb  ij)5 

1750  ^ 4‘J 

2250  j\ybjL>]*~ > 

2500  JjS>  J{&]\ 

3500  j\j*  ^ lS^L 

Hence  it  appears  that,  with  respect  to  numbers  when 
regarded  as  composed  of  units,  < Jjj  detracts  one  quarter  of  one 
from  the  quantity  mentioned,  as  \j~j  adds  one  quarter,  and 

c 

one  half  to  it;  but  if  the  collective  term,  hundred  or 
thousand,  without  any  less  quantity,  is  used,  it  becomes  con- 
sidered as  the  integer,  and  such  portions  as  above  described  of 
the  collective  itself  are  taken  away  or  added  by  these  prefixes. 
syS  moreover,  implies  half  as  much  again  as  the  number  it 

o 

qualifies  ; and,  c/lfcjl  more  than  doubles  it  by  one  half  of 
itself. 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


1 10 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

On  the  formation  of  Derivatives. 

45.  Abstract  nouns  are  often  formed  from  adjectives  by 
subjoining 


T 

as 

L f warm  weather  from 

V 

warm. 

eil 

- 

f: 

f; 

r 

y j,  ( abundance  — 

c^j  much. 

— 

— 

C 

if&o  sweetness  — 

G 

sweet. 

J 

— 

height  — 

high. 

ls\ 

— 

9 

f\ji  evil  — 

9 

J • 

Jf 

— 

0-sLii^  carefulness  — 

careful. 

b 

V 

— 

c 9 

old  age  — 

y J'  O 

G * 

old. 

erf 

— 

"jyo  fatness  — 

fat. 

bj 

V 

— 

bjtuj  widowhood  — 

b-j  widow. 

\S 

— 

c 

bLfi  softness  — 

J-</  soft. 

J 

— 

g 

(J-+Z  deficiency  — 

^ little. 

L? 

— 

freshness  — 

ip  fresh. 

— 

G 

b\jjS  bitterness  — 

G 

bitter. 

HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


ill 

Or  from  primitive  nouns  substantive  by  affixing  to  them 

^ o 

tul  as  humanity  from  man. 

e-JT  — cu-aUb  a counsel  — 

But  they  are  still  more  abundantly  derived  from  verbs,  the 
most  common  of  them  being  the  same  in  form  as  the  second 
person  singular  of  the  imperative,  likte  speech,  sl=-  desire ; 

s. 

or  as  the  second  person  plural  of  the  imperative,  like  jbj 
pressure,  force,  from  Ubj  to  press  : they  are,  also,  frequently 
the  same  as  the  present,  or  past,  participle  in  either  gender ; 

o t c 

so,  UjJ  the  faculty  of  speech,  a saying  or  order,  csfp  in- 

.V 

crease , a reckoning,  fp  speech,  from  speak,  say, 

ij:  increase,  f reckon.  They  are,  moreover,  to  be  obtained 
by  adding  to  the  second  person  singular  of  the  imperative 


1 f 

**  ✓ 

as 

s- 

a feeding  from 

^4  feed. 

JT 

— 

s- 

,_5  \p  a sowing  — 

sow. 

it 

— 

a burning  — 

Jo-  burn. 

c 

cUl 

— 

t c 

a reading  — 

,>  v O 

c 

read. 

->V 

'j 

— 

9 

deception  — 

9 

deceive. 

s 

. ii . . 

‘--'j 

— 

cib»ls~>  preparation  — 

U-'  prepare. 

— 

9 

uUa&J  a calling  — 

9 

h call. 

u-T 

— 

. -L)  thirst  — 

^ -j- 

. p drmk. 

wv. 

112 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


Or,  by  affixing  lo  the  past  participle 

as  application  from  l£)  applied. 

<—>  — uJL»  miring,  &c.  — t<  mixed. 

And  Persian  nouns  of  this  description  are  often  had  by  the 
addition  of  to  adjectives  or  to  the  imperatives  of  verbs  in 
that  language  ; as,  production,  from  Ijw  produced ; 

knowledge,  from  know. 

4 6.  The  noun,  which  denotes  the  performer  of  any  act  or 
the  dealer  in  any  thing,  is  frequently  obtained  by  subjoining 

C 

ip  or  to  the  inflected  infinitive  of  a verb  ; so,  asmiter, 

(/ 

a speaker  ; and  by  adding  to  nouns  or  verbal  roots  the 
same  affixes,  or 


la 

op 

as  a trotter  from 

09 

. Po  a trot. 

jla 

9 

— a bracelet-seller  — 

/ 

a bracelet . 

A 

U 

u v * U wharfinger 

a wharf. 

- ;W 

j 

— a goldsmith  — 

l)j-  gold . 

f 

— a currier  — 

-/  V 

fU-  leather. 

)? 

o 

fl  cook  

^ V. 

an  oven. 

i 

/o 

— a watchman  — • 

a watch. 

9 

y 

— 1PP  a servant  — 

JJ  service. 

0 w 

— l^sr^  a fisherman  — 

nfah' 

HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


bV 

as 

a deserter  from 

flee. 

y 

— 

G 

« snake-catcher — 

G 

i — J L a snake. 

V 

UT 

— 

a runner  , — 

G 

jjj  r*m. 

- — 

L_5— j«Ai— : a messenger  — 

G 

a message. 

VJ 

s 

— 

G 

a butter-man  — 

butter . 

by 

— 

lib-fT  a grass-cutter  — 

grow. 

— 

a spearman  -— 

« spear. 

u 

— . 

' G 

b*a>}^.  a rider  — 

••  ->  v 

G 

mount. 

— . 

G 

a writer  — 

G 

write. 

✓ 

o'T 

— 

a swimmer  — 

swim. 

>' 

— 

a great  drinker  — 

u4- 

jb 

— 

Jbjfa  cowherd  — 

ji  a <?ow. 

— 

a carter  — 

a ear*. 

C 

— 

i"  & . 

v,ji  a singer  — . 

if 

W, 

— 

WjU  a ploughman  — 

a plough. 

wV 

— 

a porter  — 

jd  a door. 

OOJ 

— 

G G G 

a farrier  — 

G 

J*j  a horse-shoe 

—* 

ji*j  a guide  — . 

dj  a wap. 

JV 

— 

a cockflghter  — 

. 

a coc&. 

V-f 

a drummer  — 

/G 

j a drum . 

> 

— 

J"^***)  a landholder  — . 

land. 

Q. 


114 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


uJ  as  an  arc^ler  from 

9 

jL  — jL^sr8  an  orat°r  — 

o 

fo  — fodJ  an  evil-doer  — 


an  arrow. 

9 

ysr  a speech. 
Jo  evil. 


fo  — jlfadif  a sinner  — sin. 

S'  S ' x 

/ — /by-  a merchant  — \dy>  trade. 

47.  Local  and  instrumental  nouns  are  often  the  same  in 

^ o 

form  as  the  infinitive  of  a verb;  so,  uyfi>  it  is  a range 

or  park  for  deer  : or,  they  may  be  derived  from  the  second 

person  singular  of  the  imperative  by  the  addition  of  (an)  or 
° c 
ij  (nl) ; as,  ULj  or  foj  a rolling-pin , from  J-j  roll;  dfo 

a pair  of  scissars,  from  fo  clip.*  But  the  latter  are  in  some 

instances  obtained  from  adjectives  by  subjoining  T,  as  'if  a 

hall , from  ground;  and,  the  former  more  frequently  from 

substantives  by  affixing 


CO  O O ✓ 


C 0 

( a lemV^e  from 

yd  a god. 

— 

UC\ 

0 0 

— a burying-place  - 

c 

- j~i  a grave 

c/' 

O/o 

— India.  — 

9 C 

Indian. 

J' 

— Jyj  a temple  — 

yd  a god. 

* j a village,  from  dwell ; ffo  a broom,  fromjl^  sweep;  and 

^ o c 

a bed,  from  spread,  also  occur. 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


115 


f\ 


JL> 


as  Wj->  Siva's  temple  from  Siva. 


c , >a flower-garden 


y 

a flower. 


JL^  a stable  — 
3Lrj^  a cow-house  — 


a horse. 
a com;. 


— j rf  j\i  city  of  Ghazi — 
*>bT  — city  of  Haidar 

G 

— ^UJi  a pen-case  — 


(proper  names). 


jlj  — a tulip-bed  — 

cp, 

if*  — a rose-bower  — 

— i\Cc\J\  a resting-place 


jJi  a yen. 

a tulip. 
Jb  a rose. 
~ rest. 


r-> 


Instrumental  nouns,  moreover,  are  sometimes  deduced  from 


substantives 

i,  by  the  addition  of 

J» 

as  J an  hour-bell  from 

LSjf  an  hour. 

J*1 

— a camel's  nose-stick* 

\ 

— <^/b  a nose. 

>\ 

G 

— a handle  — 

c 

a /iaw/. 

*S\ 

G PC 

— <0\iLiol  a thimble  — 

G PC 

cgvSJjI  a finger. 

lJ\ 

G 

— spectacles  — 

G 

> ■ an  eye. 

48.  The  diminutive  of  a noun  is  obtained  by  affixing  to  it 

T 

as  b a little  daughter , from  fLi  a daughter. 

t\ 

-*■ “ j-c  a pea-chicken  — 

- jj-o  a peacock. 

a 2 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


11G 


a tyger's  whelp  from  a tyger. 

ill  — !L£) 


ULm 

liL.f 


c o » 

u young  Brahman  a Brahman. 


t*  ^ ^ 

^ — VSjjyb  a fawn  — 

uf  a stag. 

U — a small  bedstead  — 

a bedstead. 

ccf 

,_/J  — a small  bedstead  — 

0 

- a bedstead. 

V 

CO 

U — a poor  wretch  — 

O 

J^a  man. 

cJ\  — <_L£>y  a musket  — 

e_ >y  a cannon. 

a little  garden  — 

r 

a garden. 

Ao-  - J<s) 

\ > a kettle  — 

or  - or") 

a caldron. 

Or  by  changing  a final  T into  t j\  as 

a string,  from  L , 

a rope  ; ff  a bullet  or  pill,  from  'if  a ball. 

49.  Adjectives  may  be  formed  from 
fixing 

substantives  by  pre- 

c 

1 as  fruitless  from 

Jii  fruit. 

c 

f — impossible  — 

\jp&  to  be. 

~9 

b — Ij  hopeless  — 

-w!  hope. 

— jf  i helpless 

ib  heln • 

HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


. 117 


u as  jJo  fearless  from 

j — fof  disrespectful  — 

<__>  — J ■aj  undejiled  — 

t e-'  — incautious  — 


r* 


o 

— concordant  — 


u* 


9 


9 9 

e-jjy-j  well-formed  — 

0 O/ 

1 ill-mannered  — 


Or  by  affixing 


7 as 

c.  >» 

hungry, 

ji  - — 

alL^j  biennial 

w — 

IJj'  oily 

Ob  — 

aquatick 

^ — 

O 

Vb"’  golden 

ail  — 

0 

ajlsiL  childish 

from 


9 9 

y — sightly 

c 

y — Vjrr^  quarrelsome 


bV.)  — afflicted 

y.'  — buf^v  /«£e 


*->}  — ijff  of  the  market — 


Jfear. 
jS\  respect. 

J-e  filth. 

intelligence. 

c 

JJoJT  sound. 

9 

form,  shape . 

c 

manners. 

c .? 

hunger. 

JL  y two  years. 
J-J  oi/. 

(JO  water * 

*V  v 

gold. 

c 

Jib  a cfa7</. 

o 

contention. 

<*9 

pain. 

o 

lf=*u  the  rear. 
Jf  market. 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


1 18 


as 

^yy*-  wooden 

from 

wood. 

• > V 

<fcjj 

— 

o » 

(ic.-Ai.jij  silken 

— 

^Ljj  silk. 

*}b\ 

— 

<*j\JL  annual 

s' 

— 

JU  a year. 

h\ 

— 

juicy 

— 

U^j  juice. 

J*f 

— 

S'  is 

J-sJj  tusked 

— 

is 

i^3o  a tooth. 

— 

is? 

J-fsr  loaden 

— 

is 

a load. 

%\ 

— 

\j$  domestick 

— 

jf  a house. 

j 

— 

quarrelsome 

— 

a quarrel. 

— 

o o 

hindermost 

— 

is 

thehindpart. 

K 

— 

single 

— 

dS>\  one. 

u 

— 

? 

by  double 

— 

y two. 

If 

— 

o 

L-y 

— 

ifi  three. 

— 

c 

— 

ten. 

eS'fr 

c 

— marriageable — 

is 

bjbLj  to  marry. 

— 

uUjsjj  wise 

— 

xjj  wisdom. 

o> 

— 

c^o 

eiyjb  powerful 

— 

Jj  power. 

o 

Joj 

— 

is  G (j 

\VjLgjt,  armed 

— 

is 

arms. 

c 

— 

is  is  s' 

tXuJy  wealthy 

— 

i^-!y  wealth. 

> 

— 

jblij  faithful 

— 

b.  fidelity. 

)l— J 

— 

is 

fi~&f  mountainous 

— 

if  a mountain. 

HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


119 


sorrowful  from  ^ sorrow. 


C/l3 

— - terrible  — 

Jys  terror . 

— grievous  — 

£™e/‘. 

ji 

^ c 

— ,k13  renowned  — 

J J 

l*\3  a name. 

jf 

— jA)V  strong  — 

j)j  strength. 

]} 

— foreign-born  — 

a foreign 
country. 

V 

— blue-coloured  — 

J-3  &/«e,  indigo. 

ru 

c 

— ffs-j  saffron-coloured  — 

c 

Jju 

t-  c 

— JjU  yellowish  — 

0 

tjOjj  yellowness. 

¥ 

— 1 four-cornered  — 

)=>-  (in  comp.) /owr. 

— hexagonal  — 

fij*  six. 

50.  Adjectives  of  intensity  may  be  obtained  from  verbs, 
by  affixing  to  the  second  person  singular  of  the  imperative 

o ^ 

<J_TT  {ah')  Is  1 {aha)  or  IxiT  ( anha ) or  b ^ (icaiya)  ; as, 

-*•  c 

a great  runner , fromjj-'  run;  l&iyl  quarrelsome,  from  j!  fight ; 

p 

\fi  eloquent,  from  fi  speah. 

51.  Adjectives  and  adverbs  may  be  derived  from  pronouns  in 
various  ways ; and,  like  their  originals,  they  are  used  demon- 
stratively, interrogatively  or  relatively  ; so,  from  this,  may 


i 20 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


^ O «.  f 

be  deduced  lii'l  or  Uyl  or  li\  or  lid  this -much,  thus  many ; ^y  or 
J-'y  in  this  manner,  thus ; this-like , «<c/i ; this  place, 

O O p 

here  ; exactly  here  ; y>S\  ov  jxy\  this  way,  hither  : from 

O C/7  «•  7 707 

that ; 'xy.  or  l~;.  or  Lil  or  W that  much,  so  many  ; or 
in  that  manner,  so;  \~yy  that -tike,  so;  that,  place,  there \ 

07  C 7 ✓ 

exactly  there  ; jxS\  or  js Jui  that  way,  thither  : from  ^y 

o 

who  ? ivhat  ? which  P or  what  time  P when  ? 

O 7 0 7 

or  \^J>  or  Ls  or  [y£  how  much ? how  many?  or  J^y& 
how?  in  what  manner?  why  P L-S  what-like  ? ivhat  sort  of? 

o o ^ 

how  P where  P jxxi  or  jixJ  whither  P ^ how  many  9 

^ o 

from  ^yy  who,  what,  which,  Xy  or  when;  \^zy  or  l—s- 

7 07 

as  much  as,  as  many  as;  -{yy  or  ^yy  or  J^-'yy  as,  like  as } 

^ CO 

\~~y  ivhat  like,  as ; ^y  where ; jXSy  or  whither ; 

^y  as  many : and,  from  ^y  that,  this,  xj  or  then; 

o 7 0 7 

lyy  or  Lj  so  much  or  so  many ; ^y  or  ^yJ  or  so,  in  such 

^ Oo  /- 

manner ; L~J  such,  so  ; there ; or  ysxy  that  way ; J 
so  many. 

52.  Transitive  and  causal  verbs,  as  before  noticed  in  para- 
graph 29,  are  generally  formed  from  other  verbs  by  the  inter- 
position or  addition  of  ! or  or  j or  or  2 . The  letter  \ 
is  frequently  inserted  after  the  first  consonant  of  the  root  ; and 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


12  i 

sometimes,  though  but  rarely,  it  follows  the  second  ; in  other 

C O 

cases,  it  is  added  to  the  last : as,  hills  to  cut,  from  his  to  be  cut ; 

o <*  o 

UlO  to  take  out,  from  hiio  to  issue;  UK  to  save,  from  UK 
to  escape  : • and  are  used  immediately  before  the  last  conso- 

c O 9 O 

nant  of  the  root ; so,  IJ  ^>  to  open,  from  UL£  to  be  opened ; U — -j 

c# 

to  pound  or  grind , from  U — j £o  fee  ground  : and  or  15  are 

c 

always  subjoined  to  the  root;  as,  U to  cause  to  frighten, 

cM 

from  Uo  to  fear  ; Ulta  to  cause  to  give,  from  U.o  to  give. 
When  the  root,  moreover,  is  a monosyllable  ending  in  \ or  j 
or  either  of  these  letters  is  dropped  and  J is  inserted 

before  the  causal  sign  \ or  \^;  as,  UL£  and  UUL*  to  feed  and  to 

9 O 9 

cause  to  feed,  from  Ul^  to  eat ; U1L  and  UUL-  to  cause  to  sleep 

o 

and  to  cause  to  be  put  to  sleep,  from  Uj~-  to  sleep ; U1L  and  UljL; 
to  cause  to  sew  and  to  cause  to  be  sewed,  from  L--*  to  sew. 

s' 

53.  From  nouns,  also,  whether  substantive  or  adjective, 
some  verbs  are  derived  ; but  the  formation  of  them  is  very 
simple,  and  has  already  been  sufficiently  elucidated  at  para- 
graph 31. 


K 


122 


A GUAM  MAR  OF  THE 


CHAPTER  IX. 

On  the  Syntax. 

f ; 

54.  The  noun  in  the  genitive  case  commonly  precedes  that 
denoting  its  issue  or  appendage,  as  does  the  adjective  in  like 
manner  its  substantive:  with  these  exceptions,  and  unless  a 
conjunction  occurs,  a relative  pronoun,  or  some  word  which  by 
way  of  emphasis  takes  the  lead,  the  nominative  case  to  the  verb 
generally  presents  itself  first  in  a sentence  ; nouns  in  the  dative, 
accusative  and  ablative  cases  if  necessary,  a participle  or  ad- 
verb, may  follow  almost  promiscuously  ; but  the  verb  com- 
monly completes  and  finishes  the  whole : so,  lij  Is  Ud.  ^ 

Ifbj  *£  .isP  i — ■ f j b-j  bsri  [g  JCj  L-tj  ^ j+t  f 

hut  the  king's  son , through  the  pain  of  separation , was  so  dis- 
tressed, that  he  sat  ( and)  abandoned  eating , drinking,  sleeping, 
the  affairs  of  government,  and  every  thing  whatever.  In 
poetry,  however,  and  in  the  higher  style  of  prose  sometimes, 

✓ c 

but  little  regard  is  paid  to  this  arrangement ; as,  ^ 

s’  s*  c 

f>  vjlcs-  <f  ^ the  wine  of  youth  has  mounted  up  in  all. 

55.  Nouns  of  various  genders,  joined  together,  require  that 
the  adjective,  verb  or  participle,  governed  in  common  by  them, 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


123 


*■  9 

should  be  used  in  the  masculine;  as,  ^^3  Lj  liU  , $ 

c c y 

Jj  fi>  her  father,  mother , brother , were  all 

three  meditating  her  marriage.  In  regard  to  inanimate  beings, 
however,  the  adjective  usually  agrees  in  gender  with  the  noun, 

G 9 

nearest  which  it  is  placed  ; so,  {fig  j>i\£  } 

^jjj  your  sort's  booh  and  paper  are  fallen  here. 

56.  Two  nouns,  relating  to  the  same  person  or  thing,  usually 

G S-  ? 

agree  without  the  intervention  of  any  word  ; as, 
his  brother  Bihram  : but  the  postpositions  f fi  li  by  which 
nouns  of  various  import  are  generally  linked  together,  seem 
on  certain  occasions  to  be  idiomatically  dropped  in  the  Hin- 
dustani, especially  if  the  first  is  a noun  of  measure  or  weight  ; 

on  the  bank  {of)  the  Ganges ; fiyjfi  a thousand 
tolas  {of) gold:  and,  on  the  contrary,  their  use  in  some  cases 

G G 

may  appear  to  us  redundant ; as  bul  l i ft  the  word  fkr  or  Jikr's 
word.  "Ihese  postpositions,  moreover,  are  adopted  to  denote 
purpose,  worth,  size,  possibility,  totality,  &c.  as  well  as  mere 

G G ✓ ; ✓ 

relationship  ; so,  an  eating-room  ; p 

G 

a horse  worth  two  hundred  rupees  ; ^ a boy  with  a 

large  head ; f U-ry-  this  ( female ) cannot  live  ; 

1 the  whole  field ; c-***  ^ 1 ■ all  together  ; jsy- 

all  a picture. 


R 2 


121 


A GRAMMAR.  OF  TIIF 


57.  The  nominative  case  is  frequently  used  after  a transitive 
verb  ; but  no  inflexion  of  a noun  can  take  place  unless  it  is 
occasioned  by  a postposition  or  preposkion,  expressed  or  under- 
stood ; and  the  latter  often  happens  in  expressions  which  from 
use  are  become  idiomattcal  without  the  postposition ; as 

5- 

jbj  y do  tell  vie  the  name  of  this ; U-  f go  home; 

9 c c o 

U*  & UCo  y^CiT  <0  neither  seen  {with)  eyes  nor  heard  {with) 

sf/  r y 

ears  ; ijfS  'dds  (cw)  the  hank  {of)  the  Ganges  ; ~f  [in)  a 

9 

good  manner ; (at  the  abode ) of  him  were 

two  daughters , or  he  had  two  daughters,  an  ellipsis  of  ^,1,; 
occurring  in  this  and  generally  in  similar  sentences.  When, 
moreover,  a noun  in  the  dative  case  is  to  be  used  in  the  same 
sentence  with  another  noun  more  immediately  acted  upon  by 
the  verb,  the  nominative  must  be  adopted  for  the  latter  ; unless 
both  words  are  pronouns,  when  each  may  be  followed  by  its 

C 9 C O / 

casual  sign  ; so,  fjzj  Jf  i_sf  y give  thou  thy  dough- 
ter  to  my  son;  l£yj  f y / will  give  him  to  you  ; in 

which  last  expression  the  precedence  of  the  objective  to  the 
dative  case  may  be  remarked  as,  perhaps,  necessary  in  such 
sentences  to  prevent  ambiguity  ; but  when  the  nominative 
is  substituted  for  the  accusative,  as  in  the  first,  it  may  option- 
ally precede  or  follow  the  dative.  And  if  two  or  more 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


125 


words  in  the  same  oblique  case  are  used  together,  the 
postposition  is  commonly  subjoined  to  the  last  only ; as 

✓ c P 

A f ^jby  ^ iJj-o  mines  of  gold,  silver,  copper, 
iron,  &c.  and  if  they  are  in  an  oblique  case  of  the  plural, 
though  a conjunction  intervenes,  the  plural  sign  may  be  omitted 

**  Ct  ^ s' 

in  all  such  words  but  the  last : as,  u jj' 
how  shall  we  give  a description  of  the  elks  and  deer  ? 

58.  The  simple  postpositions  follow  immediately  the  nouns 
they  govern  ; but  such  nouns,  participles  or  adverbs,  as  are  in 

common  used  postpositively,  may  sometimes  precede  the  words 

9 o o fi 

with  which  they  are  constructed  : so,  «$i'L  or  f 

Ox-  O ^ I 

with  him-,  f or  f through  fear; 

l/  ow'Uv  or  u-V,  iJ  near  the  horse. 

) 1 

. 59-  Of  the  postpositions  denoting  the  ablative  case,  LS- 
is  more  usual  and  more  polite  than  or  and  for  the 
dative  and  accusative  in  pronouns  & or  fi  is  accounted 
more  respectful  than  the  terminations  ,_?!  and  . 

6o.  Adjectives,  if  immediately  preceding  or  following  their 
substantives,  must  be  made  to  agree  with  them  in  gender,  case 
and  number;  but,  when  separated  by  any  other  word,  they 
may  be  used  in  the  uninflected  form  of  the  masculine  singular, 
whatever  the  state  or  gender  of  the  substantives  may  be;  as, 

C9  P 

jf  M £ jgst  f ^ make  his  face  black. 


126 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


Cl.  With  numerals,  the  singular  form  of  a noun,  whether 
in  the  nominative  or  any  other  case,  is  generally  preferred  to 

O 

the  plural ; as,  jU~  vj  three  soldiers  beat  four 

o' 

men ; lay*  f there  may  he  something  less  than 

y 9 

a thousand  horse ; (orr6  in  six  months  I 

shall  die. 

6 2.  The  personal  pronouns  may  be  occasionally  omitted, 
when  the  sense  is  clear  without  them  ; and  though,  if  ex- 
pressed, they  generally  precede  the  verb,  yet  they  are  some- 
times used  after  it,  in  prose  even,  but  much  more  frequently 

9 9 ' 9 

in  poetry;  so,  ^ IjiJ*  jir 8 yr  (Wy6  ( I am ) not  Moses 

that  1 should  perambulate  Mount  Sinai;  Lo  ^ 

lihe  the  zephirs  we  have  fleeted  away.  When,  too,  the  femi- 
nine genitive  of  a pronoun  or  adjective  or  even  a verb  is 
adopted  in  the  feminine  without  any  noun  expressed,  some 
such  word  as  business,  affairs,  is  generally  understood:  so, 

o 9 ' c c 

<0  wi  ^j\  4j  he  neither  mentions  his  own  (affairs')  nor 

/ <-£ 

attends  to  (those)  of  othets ; Jos  whatever 

was  to  be  that  (has)  happened. 

63.  In  speaking  of  one’s  self  with  another,  it  is  customary* 
to  give  the  first  person  the  precedence;  and  for  that  person 
even  the  plural  is  often  adopted,  though  an  individual  only 

O 9 ' 

is  intended ; as,  f **  or  ffi  ^ yow  and  I will  go  : 


/ 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


and  should  the  saying  of  a third  person  be  reported,  the 
same  pronouns  and  the  same  words,  in  every  respect,  are 
commonly  adopted,  as  were  used  by  the  first  speaker ; so, 
tj  J,  ^ he  said  that  I shall  not  go,  meaning 

in  our  idiom,  that  he  should  not  go.  ^ jU 
the  king  wished , that  striking  the  sword  I will  die , meaning, 
that  he  would  die, 

64.  The  second  personal  pronoun  is  rarely  used  in  the 
singular,  except  from  motives  of  adoration,  endearment,  fami- 
liarity or  contempt:  in  speaking  respectfully  to  any  one,  the 
plural  of  this  pronoun  at  least  must  be  adopted  ; but,  when  a 
dependant  addresses  his  superior,  or  a great  degree  of  deference 

G G 9 

is  intended,  self , master,  CL^^your  worship, 

G — 9 

my  patron,  oOj'jJ-  my  Lord,  your  highness,  or  some  such 

term  of  honor,  must  be  used  with  a verb  in  the  third  person 

•’  w G / g / 

plural;  as,  ys  V i what  do  you  say? 

you  said  exactly  so  ; [f  your  highness  shall  order ; 

' G G 9 

•>.  Sir!  what  they  (for  you)  say  is 

right.  In  mentioning,  too,  a third  person  with  respect,  the 

9 

plural  is  substituted  for  the  singular  ; as,  ^ he  or  she  said , 

G G G s'  w G 

iS4^g  -Jo  »liob  the  king  seated  in  the  seraglio 

teas  viewing  the  dance  : and,  the  plural  emphatick  termination 


] 28 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


^ (on)  in"pronouns  seems  to  make  expressions  in  which  they 

o 07  ? 

are  used  still  more  respectful ; so,  bUy  he  or  she  said  or 

commanded.  When,  moreover,  any  one  speaks  with  humility 
of  his  own  actions  or  circumstances  to  a superior,  or  seeks  even 
to  address  his  friend  very  respectfully,  it  is  customary  to  sub- 

C 9 G 

stitute  such  words  as  jf-hi  |*lc  sjcj  slave , servant , 

beggar , poor  creature , sinner , &c.  or  in  the  latter  case 

y c'  CO 

(^=Ur° jloc-yj  friend,  well-ivisher,  &c.  for  the  first  per- 
sonal  pronoun  ; so,  ^ ^ (your)  slave's  home 

o c 

fs  zw  Dihli,  meaning,  my  home  is  at  Dihli ; f <_>1  aL* 

Sir,  your  service  cannot  be  performed  by  (me  your) 

slave  ; £/ze  friend  will  see  the  mus- 

ter's son  to-morrow,  or,  I shall  see  your  son,  Sir,  to-morrow. 

9 

6 5.  For  the  third  person,  Sj  is  generally  adopted ; but, 
when  discrimination  is  necessary,  is  applied  to  the  object 

t " 

9 

near  at  hand  or  to  that  last  named  in  discourse,  and  tj  to  the 
remote  or  the  first  mentioned  ; as  the  English  word,  this , is 
used  in  opposition  to  that,  or  the  latter  in  contradistinction  to 
the  former.  A demonstrative  pronoun,  moreover,  in  the  sin- 
gular, may  be  used  with  an  Arabic  plural,  though  even  the 
subsequent  verb,  also,  differ  from  it  in  number ; thus, 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


129 

c coo 

Jfj  ffj*  <S])  when  the  king  saw  these  manners 

of  his  son. 

66.  When  a pronoun  referring  to  the  same  person  or  thing 
as  the  nominative  case  to  the  verb,  in  one  member  of  a 
sentence,  is  necessary,  the  common  <-JT  must  then  be  used 

c 

instead  of  the  peculiar  or  demonstrative  ; so  Isj  UjI  tell  thy 
name ; fj  the  prince  began  to  say  in 

p ✓✓  c 

his  own  mind ; |*U!s  y <__>!  ho  do  not , wretch,  administer 

medicine  to  thyself.  But  if  adopted  in  a respectful  sense 
merely,  as  noted  at  paragraph  64,  this  word  does  i.ot  admit  of 

o'  c o ^ 

inflexion  before  postpositions;  so,  ^ ^jJbj ysf/y 

s C P 

, ^ gL:  I have  pleasure,  sir,  in  your  living  a long  life ; and 

c 

never  UA  &c.  unless  as  the  simple  pronoun.  When,  in  a 
second  member  of  a sentence,  however,  a pronoun  refers  to 
the  same  person  or  thing  as  the  nominative  of  the  verb  in  the 
first,  the  peculiar,  and  not  the  common,  must  then  be  adopted  ; 
so,  l-j\j  tjn*  I and  my  father. 

67..  To  pronouns,  and  more  rarely  to  nouns,  the  reflective 
cJT  or  self,  and  the  adjective  ^ own,  are  subjoined  to 
denote  peculiarity,  identity  or  emphasis  ; but  the  adverb^s^ 

or  which  generally  becomes  f when  subjoined  to  yys* 

9 9 t F 

.-j  or  UJ  J is  most  in  use  for  this  purpose,  and  even 


s 


130 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


cJT  or  Op-  may  be  employed  at  the  same  time  with  it;  so, 

s-y  P * s s' 

\J  ^ Jp  (J  I myself  completed  this ; 

y c 

l/  c*  house  *s  my  own  > \jr^  ™ this  verl' 

m ~ S S y ** 

altercation ; ^ c_jI  (j~*  or  <_JT  ^ I my  very  self;  cJ? 

US’  ^ J,  of  myself  I transacted  this  business ; at 
that  very  (place).  And  to  <__>T  when  adopted  as  an  appellative 
of  honour,  Op-  is  at  times  subjoined,  or  even  or  if 
plurality  is  intended. 

6S.  As  a mere  interrogative,  Li  what P which?  is  not  ap- 
plicable to  persons ; but  it  is  often  used  threateningly,  or 
to  express  satisfaction,  astonishment  or  desire : and  in  these 
senses,  it  may  be  immediately  followed  by  the  appellations 

c CO 

of  human  beings;  as,  sd\y^f~  L£  what  a scoundrel ! L£  Lp.o 

^^00/  o o ^ 

^ lys  l&i]  L5~^  lL£>1  what  is  he  seeing  (or 

he  is  astonished  at  seeing ) that  a devotee  is  suspended  head 
downwards  in  a tree.  It  may  be,  also,  adopted  discrimina- 

Cs  P P<s 

tively ; as,  -=  Li  whether  Hindu  or  Musalman. 

In  negative  sentences,  the  interrogatives  whether  pronouns 
or  adverbs,  are  idiomatically  preferred  to  the  relatives  ; so, 
LjU-  -jtf)  sj  who  he  is  I know  not ; 

LT  whence  and  when  he  came  I know 
not:  but  in  interrogative  sentences  where  no  negation  is 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


131 


expressed,  the  relative  pronoun  may  be  substituted  for 

C P ' O 

the  interrogative;  as,  ys  in- 

^ O O 9 

stead  of  ^ ys>  y do  you  know  where  the 

gentleman  lives  P To  denote  non-existence , dissimilitude  or 
difference,  moreover,  the  adverb  or  is  very  emphati- 

/ P 

cally  used;  as,  <J}j  ^ W'j  tij  where  is  that  'prince? 
where  that  princess?  meaning,  that  they  exist  not;  Vb 

~j±>  where  is  king  Bhoj  ? where  Ganga  the  oil- 
mam  ? importing  that  there  is  no  resemblance  between  them  ; 

f ' - o 

^ / L5^  9*  ‘J*  <J.A  yi;  o-  the  cat  that  eats 

its  own  young  is  not  likely  to  let  the  rat  escape. 

69.  The  relative  o-  or  may  frequently  precede  its 

substantive,  and  the  demonstrative  pronoun  is  often  substi- 

P P o 9 

tuted  for  the  correlative  ; so,  *j  U'  ba>U-  L 
Li  _/Lo  which  prmcess  he  liked  best , /o  for  giving  that 
fruit  he  said:  and  though  «=-  is  more  commonly  used  than 
wy=-  and  than  yet,  in  reply  to  the  interrogative  ^ 
the  latter,  for  the  sake  of  sound  or  emphasis,  seems  prefer- 
able. 

79.  The  words  ffi  and  are  constantly  used  in  an 
indefinite  sense  ; but  is  generally  applied  to  animate 


132 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


beings  and  to  inanimate : this  distinction  however  is  not 

o_ 

always  observed  ; so,  jo  any  thing,  some  yuan. 

7 1.  The  verb  commonly  agrees  in  gender  and  number  with 
the  nominative  or  agent  of  the  sentence  ; except  that,  to  a 
number  of  irrational  beings,  taken  collectively,  a singular  verb 
may  be  attributed  ; and,  that  in  general  a plural  verb  is  used 
with  such  terms  of  honour  or  respect  in  the  singular  as  are 

C s 9 

substituted  for  the  second  personal  pronoun  : so,  to  to 


he  makes  a practice  of  guarding;  -o  when  this 

intelligence  arrived;  tT or  hundred  horse 

s'  c o c 

came ; f\  fS  cJT  f \fso  your 

highness  has  with  great  labour  come  on  my  account;  f\ 

c 

jij>  Jtijl  y°ur  majesty  shall  direct.  And,  when  two 

or  more  nominatives  of  different  genders  come  together  in  the 
same  member  of  a sentence,  the  verb  and  participles  usually 
accord  with  the  masculine  in  this  particular,  as  before  exem- 
plified at  paragraph  55.  Transitive  verbs,  however,  in  any 
past  tense  of  the  active  voice,  in  construction  with  which  the 
affix  ti  must  follow  the  agent,  are  made  to  agree  in  gender 
and  number  with  the  object  of  the  sentence,  provided  that  it 
is  a noun,  either  understood,  or  stated  as  is  most  usual  in  the 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


1 3.i 

nominative  case;  but  if  the  object  be  placed  in  the  oblique 
case,  or  if  it  is  a member  of  a sentence,  the  verb  is  invariably 
used  in  the  third  person  singular  masculine.  The  agent  of 
the  sentence,  when  expressed,  in  this  construction  is  generally 
inflected  by  <J  if  capable  of  inflexion  ; the  first  and  second 
personal  pronouns  being  the  only  words  liable  to  change  for 
case,  that  retain  the  form  of  the  nominative,  whether  in 
the  singular  or  plural,  before  this  affix.*  With  the  verb 
b'J  to  bring,  however,  which  is  in  fact  compounded  of  take 

o 

and  UT  to  come , or  with  Uhj  to  speak,  though  the  former  seems 
in  all  cases  to  convey  a transitive  meaning  and  the  latter 
sometimes  so,  this  construction  is  never  admitted  ; as, 
IAJ  j vf  lS  £ « Brahman  purchased  (and)  brought 

9 

an  egg-plant ; he  said  that — . 

72.  The  form  of  the  infinitive  serves  for  the  gerund  or 
verbal  noun,  and,  in  many  cases,  for  the  noun  of  instrument 
or  of  place,  as  has  been  already  noticed  : but  it  is  also  some- 
times used  instead  of  the  imperative,  or  elliptically  to  denote 

o / 

the  absolute  necessity  of  the  action  ; as,  Lfe,  Jili  ^ 

cc;  o / 

(it  is  necessary ) not  to  remain  neglectful  of  him  ; 


See,  moreover,  paragraph  25  and  the  note  to  it. 


134 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


c c ^ 

you  (must)  arrive  quickly ; ijfof  I can  by  no 

" ✓ ✓ 
c 

means  obey  your  (word)  ; V*  (there  is  an  absolute 

necessity ) of  this  not  remaining. 

73.  The  past  participle  sometimes  in  its  simple  form,  but 

P 

more  frequently  when  compounded  with  ly*,  is  adopted  ellipti- 
cally  or  absolutely  in  the  state  of  the  inflected  masculine  sin- 
gular, whatever  the  gender  or  number  of  the  governing  noun 
may  be,  to  denote  the  condition  or  circumstances  of  the  agent 
in  the  performance  of  the  action  denoted  by  the  subsequent 

S-  Of  c 

verb  ; as,  ^ taken  of  him  or  for  his  sake  ; csfo 

P 

stricken  of  which  or  through  which  ; fbc  jjrr®  <— ^3  fo  ‘-1 — : 

C ^ p 

having  made  to  accord  all  the  instruments  in  one 

C P O (j  c 

tone  (she)  was  dancing  ; ^ if 

^ O 9 O ^ 

j hundreds  of  fairy  faced  (damsels)  ar- 
rayed in  garments  of  various  colours  are  swinging.  And  the 
present  participle,  whether  in  the  simple  form  or  compounded 

P 

with  IjA,  is  also  much  used,  in  like  manner  and  in  the  like 
state  of  the  inflected  masculine  singular,  to  denote  an  action 
simultaneous  with,  or  the  immediate  cause  of,  what  the  follow- 
ing  verb  declares  ; as,  ^ y 

y fo  y\  ij  ys:£  \j f on  going  away  he  had  kept  saying  that  (on) 
mounting  on  this  do  not  use  the  whip  nor  strike  the  sjmr  ; 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


135 


✓ 9 C c ft 

^ UlC  L5=-  f p*  (by)  saying  what  is  improper,  the 

mind  becomes  sad:  with  ^jb,  the  particle  of  peculiarity  or 

o 

identity,  or  with  time,  subjoined,  the  simple  present  par- 

CO  ft 

ticiple,  too,  is  thus  very  frequently  adopted  ; as,  ^ 

Sj  ^ immediately  on  seeing  that  she  remained  as  one 


aghast ; ^ -^sr0  sjJ  uUj  ii  liyj  the  divinity  {at) 

the  time  {of ) giving  the  fruit  told  this  to  me.  Both  the  past 
and  present  simple  participles,  moreover,  are  often  used  in  the 
same  state  and  elliptical  manner,  substantively,  in  composition 
with  a preceding  noun  ; and  sometimes  they  are  constructed 
with  a preposition  or  postposition,  or  with  a genitive  case ; so. 


y v 

fpb  {on)  the  become  evening ; Sp*  ^ {on)  the  becoming 

c c 0 

morning  ; JjU  Jj  {in)  the  striking  an  eyelid ; L5£s'*~!  Lj  without 

9 

having  understood;  d,'l>  L>  without  having  heard  a word; 

^ c J\j  ^ since  night  remaining  two  hours ; 

" “ ✓ " 

c 

f {in)  the  living  of  her  husband;  (in)  the 


remaining  of  me  or  before  me ; L {at)  the  sight  of 

which : they  are,  also,  both  frequently  used  as  nouns  of  either 
gender  : and,  when  adopted  adjectively,  if  separated  in  con- 
struction from  the  substantive,  they  are  used  as^  uninflected 
masculines  singular,  whatever  the  case,  gender  and  number  of 


1 36 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


the  substantive  may  be  ; so,  Xj  \y*  £ JLj  seeing  the  son 
and  daughter  dead. 

74.  The  past  indefinite  of  a verb  seems  at  times  used  in  a 

I',  9 

present  or  future  sense ; as,  y i^Ujs  £ fu  ^ yy 

if  she  he  found,  then  my  life  remains , otherwise  it  is  gone ; 

' - 9 c ' C 

Li  L£ jj&*  c_j\  liL-  he  thought  in  his  own 

mind , now  this  certainly  will  eat  me  up. 

75.  The  present,  when  celerity  in  the  performance  of  any 
enterprise  is  emphatically  denoted,  may  be  used  in  the  sense 
of  the  future  ; as,  fl  £ JfjJ  uf6  UV  j?  ff  ^ 

9 C CO 

LSif«L>  I am  this  instant  going  home ; and,  having 
brought  (my)  son,  am  sacrificing  (him)  in  thy  presence. 

7b.  The  indefinite  future  or  aorist  may  not  only  convey  a 
present  meaning,  but  it  may  be  constructed  with  an  auxiliary 
verb  as  a present  participle  even  ; yet  when  used  in  the  latter 
way,  it  may  be  often  understood  as  retaining  its  future  sense  : 

*-'y  «• 

so,  £ ^.Co  L7  Jf>  g~<.  in  this  (space  of  time) 

gone  forth  (many)  hos  he  beholds  the  evening  come ; L* 

J*  ySjfv  Jk*  / “ j- jV  (1 r*  the  light-Paced 

zephyr  whirls  round  the  lawn,  imparting  to  the  brain  the 

C ^ 9 „o 

fragrance  of  the  rose  ; <0  ij  neither  cold  nor 

9 9 

hot  pleases  ; ^£t>  ^£4  I am  opening  or  I am  about  to  open  ; 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


137 


> > £ t ? t.  X* 

^ys>  cL-yj  ^/T  ^JX  <^)  Lx*  I am  ab°ut  t°  make 

manifest  my  former  state  before  thee. 

k 

77*  The  adverbs  of  negation  or  or  may  be  used 
either  before,  or  after,  verbs : however  is  peculiar  to 

imperatives,  or  to  infinitives  adopted  for  them  ; <0  may  be 
applied  to  any  mood,  but  in  prose  it  rarely  can  be  postponed 
to  the  verb ; whilst  though  incapable  of  being  joined  to 
an  imperative,  is  yet  more  emphatical  and  in  more  general 

G 9 

use  than  <0  with  the  other  parts  of  a verb  ; so,  i^~<>  do 

9 

not  ask ; l^-xc  pray  do  not  forget ; *JU-  do  not  suppose  ; 

9 9 

tiy  h—  US’  [S. 1 place  not  thy  affections  any 

ichere  ; what  hast  thou  not  heard  ? When  the  emphatick 
moreover,  is  adopted,  it  frequently  with  elegance  supplants 
the  present  of  the  verb  ys  at  the  end  of  a sentence  ; as, 

9 G 9 

fs  f uli>  acts  of  cruelty  (are)  not  becoming 
thy  dignity. 

78.  The  conjunctions  <6  and  that,  are  adopted  at  the 
beginning  of  one  member  of  a sentence,  which  points  out  the 

0 9 9 

object  or  reason  of  another  generally  preceding  ; as, 

Om  9 ' GO  x- 

“ j lys  U-j  ^ ±$\  we  congratulate 

thee,  happy  prince  ! because  an  heir  to  the  crown  and  throne  is 

9 

born.  To  & moreover  such  adverbs  as  b'  or  are  frequently 

T 


138 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


9 C C 9 s C O 

subjoined  ; as,  ly~<  b strike  off 

(his)  head,  to  the  end  that  I may  never  more  see  (his)  face. 

I 

This  conjunction,  too,  may  be  used  by  the  way  of  comparison 

C CO 

or  distinction  ; as,  ^JT  dS;)  (that)  one  man 

9 <j?  C 

die  is  better  than  a whole  city ; o»J  y f~s\  thou  mayest 

take  either  this  or  that : it  is,  moreover,  sometimes  used 

^ O CO  c 

in  the  sense  of  saying  that ; as,  j}\ 

9 p c 9 

fys  t__>\  J jj  fjg  tl&j  saying  this,  he  called 

for  the  throne,  and  having  given  (him)  pan  (and)  tilak  seated 
(him)  on  it,  (saying)  that  you  are  now  become  invincible:  but 
it  may  be  adopted  as  the  relative  pronoun,  after  the  idiom  of 
the  Persians : and  in  some  cases,  the  application  of  it  seems 
intended  merely  to  unite  the  members  of  a sentence,  the 
meaning  in  other  respects  appearing  redundant. 

79.  The  conjunctions  j>\  or  j\  or  j may  be  used  almost  pro- 
miscuously, though  jj\  is  generally  adopted  to  connect  sen- 
tences as  well  as  words,  and  j is  rarely  used,  except  to  link 

9 9 G / 

together  Arabic  or  Persian  nouns  ; as,  £ l.xi-  JiL 


o ✓ ^ ^ o 

fi  J.AC  J ^ bit  ^ 


C 9^9  *.9 

j yj  iifi*  J LS“°  fc^r*  thousands 

of  thanks  to  that  God,  ivho  has  granted  to  man  supei'iority 
over  all  the  creation,  and  adorned  his  brow  with  the  studded 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


13.9 


crown  of  wisdom  ( for  his  guidance ) in  both  spiritual  and 
temporal  affairs.  In  this  example,  besides  the  uses  of  j:\  and  } 
may  be  noticed  the  application  of  the  conjuction  which 
joins  the  members  of  the  sentence,  as  remarked  in  the  pre- 
ceding paragraph,  without  importing  any  other  sense  than 
what  the  subsequent  relative  might  apparently  have  con- 
veyed. With  numerals  or  with  other  nouns,  even,  these 
copulative  conjunctions  are  sometimes  elegantly  omitted  ; as, 

^ O c c o o ^ 

hundreds , thousands,  ten 
of  thousands,  cities,  towns  are  inhabited. 

80.  The  conditional  conjunction  f\  or  yy  if  requires  the 

consequential  or  y then,  in  the  following  member  of  the 

— 9 ° **  9 - , 

sentence ; as,  liT  f y j ^ ffS  f\ 

if  any  one  shall  interrupt  thee  in  this , then  ( fail  not)  to  bring 
him  to  me. 

81.  The  adverb  ^yy  or  must  in  general  be  answered 

9 

by  the  correlative  or  and  ^yy  ^yy  by  ^y  ^y  ; in  like 

c 

manner,  the  emphatick  adverb  of  time  (ji^yyy  is  followed  by 

C y O O O 

22  9 so,  \f  j*<  ( y i^yr^22  ‘ ^ soon  as  the 

dog  ate  it,  at  that  very  moment  he  tossing  about  expired : and 
though  to  denote  comparison  may  be  applied  alone,  yet 

j>  p p ' 

as  adverbs  of  manner  and  assume  J> ; so,  ^ yS 


T 2 


140 


A GRAMMAR  OF  THE 


J^yr  {jTr  i*‘^  iIS  J may  soy,  so  it  is  incum- 

bent on  thee  to  perform  the  business. 

82.  The  usual  term  of  affirmation  or  assent  is  fz  yes,  but 

this  may  be  understood  and  sis"  A-j  or  or  i or  some 

other  appellation  of  respect  only  be  expressed,  especially  in 
the  reply  of  a servant  to  his  master,  or  of  an  inferiour  to  his 
superiour. 

83.  The  residence  of  any  one  is  often  denoted  by  and, 
if  more  than  one  place  is  mentioned,  may  be  used  dis- 
tinctively for  a similar  purpose;  as, 

f go  to  the  gentlemans  house  here,  not  to  that  there. 
Sometimes,  however,  the  mere  genitive  case  is  adopted,  the 
adverb  being  understood ; and  the  postposition  may  be 
applied  in  the  same  manner  as  : so,  f yy  Jy 


Lf'  u~\  iri/'f  u 

house,  seized  and  took  her  away  from  it. 

84.  Two  words  of  similar  meaning,  which  resemble  each 
other  in  sound,  are  often  adopted  where  one  alone  would 
suffice,  as  in  the  instance  of  f\>-  Jy  above  given  : but  one  of 
such  words  seems  frequently  to  have  no  meaning,  and  to  be 

c 9 ^ 9 

used  for  the  sake  of  the  sound  only  ; as,  AA « falsehood, 

9 9 

a whisper.  By  a repetition,  however,  of  nouns  or 


J J the  servants,  who  ran  to  her 


r 


HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE. 


141 


pronouns,  as  well  as  of  adjectives,  participles,  or  numerals, 
individuality  may  be  intended;  as,  Jh  & — • J. 

c c - o 

y ji!  ^;ls>  ^.0  tiX;i  the  judge,  having 

summoned  all  the  people,  gave  to  every  man  a stick  a piece 

c o c c 

of  a cubit  in  length  each ; ^ foj\  b_\j  let  us  each  try 

own  skill;  jjV  li  Vjy  l!X1  lSJjI  y>  each  man 

having  filed  one  by  one  a pitcher  of  milk  : and,  when  a verb 
is  repeated,  continuation  of  the  act  is  generally  denoted  ; as 
!>-  continuing  to  impel ; J'o  f 5 fc.f  keep  striking  down  : 
or,  when  two  past  participles  of  the  same  transitive  verb 

come  together,  the  latter  of  them  being  in  the  feminine 

• . ...  ^ V ^ 

gender,  reciprocity  of  action  is  intended  ; as  IX.X 

pulling  and  hauling  ; 1/  altercation ; ^ L \f  scuffle  ; 

c o 

competition,  emulation  : or,  when  precedes  a 
reduplicated  past  participle,  indifference  as  to  the  act  is 

o o S 9 

denoted  ; so,  IXo  IXo  seen  (or)  not  seen ; lys  lys  been  (or) 

not  been:  but,  when  the  past  participle  of  a causal  verb  is 
subjoined  to  the  same  form  of  the  neuter  or  active,  the  inten- 
tion is  to  shew  that  the  action  is  ready  or  completely  done  ; as, 
Uy  L>  ready  made ; blO  ly>  ready  cooked ; yU-  £>  being  com- 
pletely prepared . 


142 


A GRAMMAR. 


85.  To  the  names  of  different  classes,  different  appellations 
of  honour  are  added  by  way  of  distinction  ; thus  Brahmans 
take  or  csjji  ; Musalman  Fakirs  are  addressed 

9 

with  or  or^-j  ; Hindu  devotees  or  religious  people,  with 
or  or  or  ; Rajputs,  with  ; or  Rajputs  and 

U o 

Sikhs,  with  or  «$&«*> ; Moguls,  with  \jj<  or  or  IcT  or 

; Saiyids,  with  j~<  ; Shaikhs,  with  ; Pathans,  with 

^U-  ; Doctors,  with  cjjgj  or  or  !L>  ; Merchants  or 


Bankers,  with  iL  or  And  the  most  common  terms  of 

respectful  address,  used  generally,  are  alu  ^,1,=-  or your 

09  9 

Majesty  ! or  Sire  ! or  or  L<^-  or 

9 ^ 9 

or  B or  jj\j  Sir ! Master  ! Worship  ! 


APPENDIX. 


oome  of  the  most  common  technical  terms  of  Grammar,  with 
the  corresponding  words  or  expressions,  chiefly  derived  from  the 
Arabic  and  adopted  in  Hindustani. 


A. 


Ablative  (case)  < 

r 

or 

l 

Accidence 

I P G 

^ is*~< 

G 

Accidental 

i*y 

Accusative  i 

P<* 

or  ci— iU*- 

(case)  | 

Acted 

9 G 

Active  (voice  of 

/G 

a verb) 

Actor 

Jxli 

Adjective 

G^  G o 

•— j^-sl  or 

(with  a substan-  ( or 

tive) 

( 

Adjective  (with  f or 
its  substantive)  r 

in  the  com- 
parative or  su- 
perlative degree 

of  similitude 

of  quantity 

of  quality 


j j 


1 j*~:l 


J 


Adverb 


of  place 

of  time 

— - of  affirmation 
of  negation 


*V*  i ^ 

C O 

( — or  i—sjo 

G 

uU;  t^JJo 

G 
G 

LJ>, 


<— ;Url 


144 


APPENDIX. 


o 

c 


Adverb  of  injunction  uJ^- 


C. 


of  peculia-) 

c c 

rity  or  identity) 

of  similitude 

o 

yS- 

G G G 

of  exception 

Cm  iJy^- 

of  cause  or  ^ 

0 C 

(JA*j  uJp- 

reason  £ 

of  method 

c g 

t tr> 

of  condition 

g c 

iy*i  C— 

~ ^ O 

of  society 

* of  extremity 

g 

Affirmation  e- 

G 

>\JI  or  <— >Url 

✓ * y' 

G ? o 

Affirmative  or  <U=>-^c 

Agent  or  actor 

J.U 

~ 4 >> 

Alphabet  cj3I  or 

Lff' ^ 

Aorist 

9 

tM* 

Apocope 

G 

L— 

Article 

G 

Artificial  or  positive 

G 

Case 

CJJ&  or 

Causal  (verb) 

~ 9 O 

f or  J L*j 

J ' >*-'  - ’ 

Commencement 

iJcJl 

Common 

G >» 

Compound 

- * 
/ 

Concrete  (noun) 

G 

J or  j*  J 

J ~ / 

V L-c 

Condition 

G 

Conditional 

Conjugation 

C 

J.y  or 

Conjugate  (to) 

C G 

Conjunction 

G G 

uip-  or 

copulative 

G G 

t— 

disjunctive 

G G 

explanatory 

G 

c)W  «->>*■ 

conditional 

G G 

t A I 

APPENDIX. 


14  5 


Conjunction  \ 
consequential) 


Consonant 

o 

Construction 

o 

Wj 

Construe  (to) 

o 

Ujj  Lj j 

Context 

l or  or 

i 

r aK  or 

Correlative  1 

(pronoun)) 

Couplet 

or 

D. 


Dative  (case) 


Declension 


(.Of  la 


o S-  9 O 


( aUil  J. 

o 

for  JjJui’  or 

k C 

«-*>  or 


Definite 
article 


! 


noun 


t o 

OvXs? 


or  ^*.<5  <_Jp- 

c c 

ujL>j*7  <— 

o o 

,*~ol 


o 

Degree  (comparative)  J-*a&\Ur*s 

superlative  <UlL<> 

Demonstrative  pronoun 


- ^ 

the  noun  with  it 


CO  O 

Derivation  ^ or  uJU^il 

O 9 

Derivative  ^JeJL^c 

✓ x o 

Diacritical  points  cjI^  or 


Doubling  (of  a letter) 

Double  (letter) 
Doubtful 


oi 


or  ±)XL> 


t rUj! 


9 

Declined  or  inflected  i_J,  ! Dual 


Defective 

Definition 


L_S-> 


0 y*J 


— - in  the  dual  number 
(a  word) 


c.^ 

(n^ 

<UiiJ 


| ^ 


u 


146 


APPENDIX. 


E. 


Elision 


cut  off  by  it  (a  ^ 


i J'.  AS* 

J 


letter  or  syllable)  \ 

G 

S- 

Emphasis  j u£li‘ 

**  c 
s- 

Emphatick  ,_$ju£b 


Feminine  (of  the  gender) 
Foot  (in  verse) 

Form  (of  a word) 


G P 

Jj°r. 


UJJ 

Future  (tense  of  a verb)  JJc — « 


(futurity) 


Etymology 


ort-JiliJ  or  uJliJil 


or 

i G 

kilJ 


G. 


Euphony 
Exception 

(irregular)  or 

• G ^ 

JyLj  or  <u)Lj 


Explanatory 


J'&jL  or 


Gender 

General 

Genitive  (case) 


for  i^siUl  uaJU- 


*Ar?“ 


Genitive  (the  govern-)  „ , 

> <ul! 

ed  of  two  nouns)  j ' 


Gerund 


Expletive  <sJj  or  j*K  tJj 

i 

Explication 
Expressed 

F. 

Female 

Feminine  (gender) 


..  Governed 


/ P Gx  P G 

^ or<J*x*>Ve 

) ' . r 

G ^ G | 

>*7*^  or  Governing  or  J^b 

/ <>  /0 

j^j^orkysL,  (of  two  nouns  ) , 

in  construction)  ) 

° • G 

Grammar  y/L  or  os 
(rule  in)  *Acb 


APPENDIX. 


147 


H. 


Hemistich 


I. 


~ /’/■  p ^ 


Idiom  or  /l£jjb  or 

Immoveable  (a  con- 
sonant without  a 
vowel) 

i 

Imperative 

Imperfect  t or  l^U 

\ - o p 

tense  / j 

(verb  or  noun)  < >sib 

Indeclinable 

Indefinite  (noun  or  1 or  ^>\ 
article)  | gj$  ^ 

C 9 

(the  tense  of  a verb)  cJ?lk« 

Inferenqe  or  J*>U- 


w P 


Infinitive 


Inflection  Jo/ or  or  JjJu j 


Interjection 

Interrogative 

(pronoun) 

Irregular 


jli>  or 


L. 


Letter 


•c  * 
•ir- 


M. 


Male 


y 


Masculine  (the  gender)  jSsj 

- P 

(of  the  gender) 

C ^ O 

or  <uilS  or  /aj 


Metre 

< , 

Mood 

( Jjr;  or  or 

Moveable 

Cjysu 

N. 

Negation 

LiV  0r 

Negative 

G^* 

US""* 

u 2 

V 

148 


APPENDIX 


Neuter  verb 


$ * lw 


LSVJ  C 

Nominative  (case)  Jxlj 


(noun 


’ by  or  Ijo-.c  or  Jxli 


(***^ 


j*— >i 


g c g 

Noun  of  place  — or  J.Cc 

of  time 

— * of  instrument 

appellative  u-i*. 

c 

arbitrary  ^L-.-  *~>1 

or  name,  proper 


G p G 
* . \ 

“*  r! 

c 

~ r! 


primitive 

derivative 

concrete  or 

abstract 

G „ v 

verbal 

o 

of  the  actor 

indefinite  or 

, O G 

definite  (by  an  art.) 

diminutive 

I 

of  excess 


G^ 


r- 


^ G 


Number  (of  a verb  or  noun) 
Numeral 
Nunation 

O. 

_ G C./  G 

Origin  !ju<  or  oLy  or  JJ 

Original  or  JiU  or  l5L?1 

Orthography  QClLj  or  <£\ 
Orthographical  marks  cxlyd 

P. 

Parenthesis 
Part  of  speech 
Participle  (past) 


g / o; 


<uK 


^C.  ^ o 


APPENDIX. 


Participle  (past 
conjunctive  or 
pluperfect) 


(present) 

<0l>-  +*J\ 

Particular 

9 

/ C 

Passive  (voice  of  a verb)  Jj-ys'* 

Past  (tense) 

l/?U 

absolute  or  ) 

C 9 

^ Cm.  C 1 l~?xC 

indefinite  tense  J 

— past,  or  plu-  ) 

> 

JuxJ  ^^.sLc 

perfect  tense  ) 

present,  or  ) 

/ *-rV.y  l^u 

past  defimtetense) 

future  tense  u 

« ' X 9 

X 

-xx>> 

optative  tense 

* x x 

conditional  ) 

O 

/ l Ar1 

tense  ) 

~ 9 

Person  (first)  the  speaker 

(second)  the 

r 

spoken  to,  or,  < 

or 

present 

14  9 


Person  (third)  the  absent 


Phrase 

Plural  (number) 

Potential 

Preposition  or 
postposition 

Present  (tense) 

past,  or  ^ 

imperfect 
tense 


^ or 

J ° . 

jiu 

c 

or  uJp- 

x C ^ Ox 


or  1 


t vC 


or 


future  tense  JU. 

Prohibition  (imper.  neg.) 
Pronoun  ) 

(personal); 

(common) 

or  reflective)  ) 

Pronunciation  or 

o 

Prose 

/X 

Prosody 


loO 


APPENDIX. 


Proximate 

Q- 

Quiescent  (having 

( or 

no  vowel) 

j 

R. 

Radical 

or 

G 

ti’li  or  [Xe\ 

Regular 

l_5~ 

Lj  or  b 

Relative  (pronoun) 

pO  s c 

Jr’r6  H 

Remote 

Rhyme 

O * 

or  L-hdj  or  <uilj 

Rule 

9 

akili  or  or 

Spelling 

L os?  or  U 

c 

Substantive  (when  alone)  ^1 

(with  an  ad-  i 

| Or  l—lyeyc 

jective)  j 

i 

Superlative 

9 

a*!L*« 

Syllable  (first) 

Is 

(second) 

_»C 

(third) 

<ul* 

(fourth) 

<ul<  tJU 

G 

Synonimous 

9 

or 

Syntax 

G 

y* 

S. 


Scanning 

G 

Sentence 

o ^ 

aL*~^ 

Sign 

L^-vclLc 

Simile 

<«  o 

or  <UaLj 

✓ * ✓ 

Simple 

LmJ 

Single 

c ^ 

f or  Jo-1, 

Singular  (number) 

1 

T. 


Tense 

Tetrastich 


LS*' 


or 


or 


V. 

Verb 

Verb  intransitive 

transitive 

auxiliary 


o 

LJ*j*  ^ 


APPENDIX. 


151 


Verse  (in  opposition 
to  prose) 


(in  prosody) 

Voice  (of  a verb) 

y 

active 

% 90  S. 

passive 

9 0 S. 

y 

Vowel  (long, name-) 

~ C 

ly  i_s  or  ^ or  1)  ) 

' t^-ic  1—5/^ 

(short,  that  is  1 

or  L^$)=>- 

— •’« 
o 

C 

•-J 

or  <—>1^1 

)/"U 

Vocative  case  Ijo  u JU. 


U. 


Uncommon 

Jli) 

Understood 

or  jjJU 

/ or  I (j 

Ungrammatical 

■S  or  h 

L.  ill-*. 

Universal 

^ or 

Unlimited 

>>o  ^ ^ 

t>juXsT°  j-i. 

Uncompounded 

or 

Days  of  the  Week. 


Hindustani. 

Hindawi. 

M 

jWi; 

O 

j*i  or  ^W5 

c 

JL 

O O 

O 0^ 

ijj 

jUfc.y 

c / 

c o^ 

o ^ 

go; 

TfP*** 

Persian. 

English. 

o o 

Sunday. 

C 9 

Monday. 

o 

Tuesday. 

o c. 

Wednesday. 

• • V 

Thursday. 

&JjT 

Friday. 

C C 

t&t£>  or  auxi 

Saturday. 

152 


APPENDIX. 


The  months  in  Hindustani  and  English. 


a 

•5  © 

*1  jr.  June 
E £ 

o co 
. »— 


April 

May 


c 

‘5 

c 

'€jd 

o 

pa 


V 


July 

August 


^L-J ! October 

c 

-2L=-  November 
December 
January 
February 


ajL! 


September  or  March 


dJjJS  or 

A or  A 


The  lunar  months  of  the  Arabians  are 


> o 

/•/S?  CD 
» > «“3 


Days. 

30 


C3 


b 29 

o 30 


fc*D  or  fc*0  8 I 29 

" y 


/C«C  p 


or  aiin  jU  ^ 


30 

29 


0 Day,. 

**  30 

1 ,0 

✓ 

<Mv  g f 30 
Ji:l  1 1 29 

w y 

ijoti  or  iUxaSI  ^ 30 

- ir  . .2 

<^s=“  or  -a  29 


And  in  every  intercalary  year,  which  occurs  eleven  times 
in  the  period  of  thirty  years,  the  last  month  has  thirty  days. 


APPENDIX. 


1-53 


FABLE 

OF  THE 


Four  learned , but  indiscreet,  Brahmans , who  restored  a dead 

Tiger  to  life, 

IN  THE  DEVANAGARI  CHARACTER. 

=|rllrt  RtiST  $7  TT3TT  <1|H  *i Jl  < Rtf 

RtJRT'T  RTR  TT3TT  3R  % RTR  R ftEnTRTTsfr  RTR 
siK-lur  3?r  r;  rk  r?  cr;  3RTi7t  RtfRtRTsr 
Fftm  f^RRtf  ^ETT  ^TTITtT^i  <57R\  ftR  ^ RWR  3^ 

^ rhftr  r?tt  ft;  3rf  5Rtf  spn  ^ | 3R 
% RT  R R^fT  Rff  T^rft  RR  3RTCf 
3fr 'if  r^r  ft^;  jprr  fqn:  sg  r^t  ft;  Tra 
^frfrr'if  cr  ftstRT  t ft;  sqrft  #i  rtr;  rrr  Rtf? 
sir  r ft-^iiRi  5^ff  ft?f  t ft;  sfn; 

33fT  T| 

3ffC  3RTO  % TRte  5^t‘  ^ RT  R Rt 


X 


154 


APPENDIX. 


*f  r gnr  f^;  =rft'  fafra  ^ frrf 
3?R;  :St  RT  ftffrT  ftf  I ft  31% 

3fr  Sfit  pT  fsTRFf  t 3ftx  ft  RR  5f  ft 
srgr  K 3TrT  *ft  ftfT  ^ 1 3?tT  fft  | ff; 
:ft  =rnft  3n?fr  I sh  ^ft  f ft^  ?>  ort 
^TTT  % scTRt  ^T  3ufl«fl'  3R  R cftfr  35T 

3T^T  RfT  tft^  3TR  SfT^TT  ff^TT  fR  HR  RR  *STtf  f 
3TtR  3R  fit  Rtf  ipr  ^iT  3R^R  RRit  Rft  RFlfTT 

fff  t ff;  ftm  % 3f^t  ^r2t  #f  ^ ^ 

33"  ^J^rT  Rif  R 3Rt  % RHRi  f ffi  3Rt  fqiniq 

3ff  RR  ft  Jjlldl  f ft  ^ ft  RR  ftSRT  tt 

ffr  R^f  wtt  ff  fjRft'  f «n^m  if  fRsn  r 
r^t  ftr  strtrt  if  rot  f otfjr:  ft  :ftRR  f r#  if 

ft  RR  ROT  R Rf  Rt  RiT  ff  f Rif  3fFT  if  3^  f 

ff^  rtr  rr  sr  rkY  % OTRRf  fwir  rr:  rot 

ff  fftT  ftR  ROT  f 3fTR  if  *pft  OTT  % OT  f 3OT 
ff^  1 ff  fftf  R STOTT  fflT  RffR  Iff  RTR 

jfm'ii  a ft  % <ofi  3?r:  rot:  R ot  ff;  ff  gt  cr; 

ROT  % ROT:  R3Ri  ff3R  ft  3fR  OT!  ft  Rf  RT?  R 


/ 


APPENDIX. 


166 


3FT?fti  S3?  3?3TT *(5!  jjSI  ^5t  ?JT  -eDJ^l 
3J?J  FsfT  3TV  3T?  1%  #>  3TT3  S3  H 3*?t‘  % 
3tfft  h ^t  ft;  3TT3Tt  srjt  3i^t  ft?n  3rr?rrft  tt 
ft?  S?TTS3?  % 3%  f??T3T  ^ ft^T  3?V  5? 
Ft?  ^ 33  ft?j  ft?^n  sfft  T??f  ft  ftmt  ?t  3?  jfi? 

3fa?  S3?  % 3Pff  ?f|3r  3TT  ?3T  fWT  ftf 
^t?T  FRT  ft?%5TZ?PT7Rirlr%S?fr  3??  ? 3?T 
?f|^f  tn:  *rm  3prr  ft3T  ?f?%  % ^tfr  >rift  ? ft? 
ft  3T?  ftrrftjrr  ftt  tt??  3?  ftr??  ft?? 
ft?T  *5?  3??  S3  3rd'  d 3t  wi 

s?gt  «ptt  3^  tfn^  Tt?iT  s:  ttstt  3?  3rd  ? 

d?  3rft3?  *[w  «n  iraT  ftar?  ? 3??r  fft?  ? 

3?  ftlFST  ftftT  d£ 337 f® 

ft?  ft=n  ft?rr  ftiw  3T?  sfit  ?d"  3fft?  ft?n  ? 

fft  33?  3?tT  fft  ?T3  ftT  FT??  F3T  t 33  ft? 

% ftr3)T33T?i  ?s:  1 


X 2 


156 


APPENDIX. 


The  preceding  Fable  in  the  Persian  character. 

s to  ^ o o //  ✓ ^ ** 

j ^ S ^ j4^  (3 {"**—*?**  V“l/  4^  ^ 

O O O / 9,  9 <j  0 9 0 

£ ^ t C;  GO/  O O ✓ 

£ •>-  ^ Wl  c5^  ^ ^}  ^2>a^13 

O 9 9 9 O CO*  ^ 9 ^ o / 

i_5f-  ‘-fj'fr  *j  ^ ^ c_^  i_£^  cr^5  ^ ^ ls^  l>f“ 

; /CO  / 09  " 9 ~ 9 

LjJy*-  <£  ^ ^l5h3  \jr*  ^rb  ~ ^ It*  l— * 

\}f-  t5$  ^ L5*  (*^  ^ L_5~;  Lf^-^  J^J„  L5^  l/~r^  C—;^  tlAi  ^ 

tjrrW 

\jirS  *&  \jyS  ^V-  ^ cr?'’3^/  ls^  ‘ij*  ^ UJ^  l/  ‘/A?-  j 

/*  ^ o ^ O p o 

C,*?*  4^  LZ~&y>  jJ  &)fjrr  J?  \j~~i  j>-  u?^  jli>  L^Jj  ^ p!*.< 

OOO  O s'  s'  " O / O 

^ L/~i/“"  ^ c^3  C*--  Li1^***^  (1^  *5^  _J^  t-J'^  J**1 

4)&  (— '<\-l'1  / cT*  l/  Li^J'  Jr"  ^ LS*"^  ^ iJlT*  s£/  hfjy?"  ^ 

9 0^  ' ^ O 9 ^ 

J ^-ji  ^ e <^i  j lT^.'  ij  ^r°  er”* 

✓ " “ ✓ " ** 

o 9 » ° — C 

li  {_cj\  ^j^-£>  i_i_*^  c» j*^-'  j'^T,  ^ L/^~  ^ 

£ h?J~i)^  4 ^ ^y)  4 U~^  ^ L S^  L5*^^  J-J^  ^ cPV^  ^ 

— C £■  ✓ /•  /•  C)#  O C / / 

^ ^ ^ L-5"^  c)^10  J ^ ^ J 

■Ji^  *-r^  / >"*  'J*  ^ 


APPENDIX. 


157 


p ✓ O C O z'  t.  . c 

}~\  j*ls  ^ ^ V.P  up<  4 ^ ‘P'^Pd 

g g o ~ c^,  ^ 

up*  <-^~  e/  u®r=7  A-f£  P uA>  uP0  ‘A  l/  y^-JP  p5 

lA^  V.^  ^ 'A  /A£  cP*  Lp'  ^ d)J,  u'  eP  c"  • “V"  e/P  L5  . 

£.  G C **  «~  ? "'*  ° 

C5!^  V.A  c^r<5  uAA  *>  l5*  **£  (^  L5~°  Lr).  L5^  ^ V°  L5^  l/ 

w p G ' 

^x'x<  eJo'  tjs&  j.\  ^ Jj  jj\  uA3  s£j  uV  ypc  Lp'  <--?b  p 

o ^ oc  / <s  jjGCGG 

>SU  tlC-j  ¥ ^ «'j  Jffjt  Lp'  ^ lA^/  7 

(.0  io/  ?o  - S-  } s.  ? 

^W.1  ,_/U-  ^ i_?j^  A ^WP"  )/P~  L fjt**  h? 

■*  " ^ " X* 

c O G o ^ 07 

U")^y  V.P  usA  L5^  A ^ uP3  Gp^  4 cPJ'  err0 
l/~'  i_r~^  v’;'  ^ A up!  A ‘PjJ  Ab  up'  4 <-A.'  W*  p 

o o r:  * 

i"J  jX~*  l£!  Wr  l»-  ^U-Xk  uiA  4 L-^,3  <J.j4  P <“4j'°  (_A  _}*  CsJ^ 

P J lP  ¥57 A A ^ J1*  S&  ^ !A° 

J ^-e'j-f-  Vp  ^ f*V  p7  U~^  up  t_c)  ^ ‘A*~p  VP  '*♦?“ 

^ CO  ^ ^ 

^ ^ / e^jV  u',  l5^  ^ ^7  gP^  'tP  sp] 

U .\j  l^J  ul^¥'  (j/  ^rr0  uiJ^~  U1  Vb  ‘A  ^ ~v^  ^ up] 

i»\j  ^ lyi  i — a jji  v -Ap  1^  cjp  Vp  % us-'1  4 u-p  V 4 (*/> 

^ ^ mp  mp  GO  7 0 

up'  e’P  *P  lP  p'  fP  lP  bP  *^4  upr'  us^  A b.P¥  'p 

i j>  ^ <7  7"  ^ . ° 

tip  i^)?  4^p  ^ A?  lP^P  (J^  Sr’d”0 


153 


APPENDIX. 


A literal  translation  of  the  same  Fable  into  English. 

The  demon  said,  O king ! (there  was)  a city,  by  name 
Jayasthal ; of  that  place  (there  was)  a king  by  name  Bardha- 
man  ; in  his  city  was  a Brahman  by  name  BishnuswamI,  who 
had  four  sons ; one  (was)  a gamester ; the  second,  a gallant ; 
the  third,  a fornicator  ; (and)  the  fourth,  an  atheist.  One  day, 
that  Brahman  began  to  admonish  his  sons,  (saying)  that  who- 
ever games,  in  his  house  wealth  remains  not : hearing  this, 
the  gamester  became  much  troubled  in  his  mind.  Again,  he 
said  that  in  the  Rajnlti  it  is  thus  written,  that,  having  cut  off’ 
the  nose  (and)  ear  of  the  gamester,  expel  (him)  from  the 
country  j for  this  very  reason  it  is  proper  (to  do  so),  that  other 
people  may  not  game. 

And  the  wife  (and)  children  of  a gamester,  though  even 
being  in  (his)  house,  do  not  consider  in  the  house ; because, 
(it  is)  not  known  when  he  may  lose  them  (by  gaming).  And, 
who  are  becoming  senseless  at  the  manners  of  a prostitute, 
they  purchase  trouble  for  their  own  souls  ; and,  being  in  the 
power  of  a courtezan,  having  surrendered  their  all,  they  coniv 
mit  theft  on  (or  anticipate  their)  end.  And  it  is  thus  said, 
that  what  woman  shall  fascinate  in  one  hour  the  heart  of  a 
man,  from  such  a woman  the  wise  remain  at  a ditance  i 

I 


APPENDIX, 


159 

but  the  unwise,  making  love  with  her,  are  losing  all  their  own 
vigour,  politeness,  renown,  religion,  judgment,  firmness  (and) 

virtue ; and  to  him  (who  becomes  acquainted  with  such  a 

% 

woman)  the  admonition  of  his  pastor  applies  not  well  (or  takes 
no  hold).  And  it  is  thus  said,  that  who  has  lost  his  own 
shame,  when  will  he  fear  (meaning,  he  will  never  fear)  to  do 
dishonour  to  another  ! And  there  is  a proverb  that,  what 
cat  devours  its  own  young,  when  will  it  let  the  rat  escape ! 
(meaning,  that  it  is  not  likely  to  let  the  rat  escape,  as  explained 
at  paragraph  68  of  the  Grammar). 

Again,  he  began  to  say,  that  who  have  not  studied  science 
in  youth,  and  who,  being  in  manhood  disordered  by  lust,  have 
continued  in  the  vanity  of  youth,  they  in  old  age,  repent- 
ing, are  burning  in  the  fire  of  avarice.  (On)  hearing  this 
speech,  those  four,  having  consulted  among  themselves,  said, 
that  “ than  the  science-void  man’s  living,  to  die  is  better ; 
from  this  (reason)  this  is  best,  that  having  gone  into  a foreign 
country,  we  read  science.”  Having  settled  this  matter  among 
themselves,  they  went  into  another  city  ; and,  after  some  space 
of  time,  having  read  (and)  become  learned,  going  to  their 
home,  on  the  road  what  do  they  see ! (meaning,  e<  they  are 
astonished  at  seeing,”  as  explained  at  paragraph  68  of  the 


APPENDIX. 


160 

Grammar)  that  a Kanjar,  having  separated  the  bones  (and) 
skin  of  a dead  tiger,  (and.)  having  bound  (them  in)  a bundle, 
wishes  that  he  should  take  (them)  away.  In  this  (time)  they 
said  among  themselves,  that,  come,  each  his  own  science  let 
us  try. 

Having  settled  this,  one,  having  called  him  (the  Kanjar , 
name  of  a low  cast  of  Indians)  gave  (him)  something,  and 
taking  that  bundle  dismissed  him  : and,  being  (gone)  aside 
from  the  road,  having  opened  that  bundle,  one,  having  applied 
all  the  bones,  place  by  place,  (and)  having  repeated  a charm, 
sprinkled  them,  (so)  that  those  bones  joined  together ; the 
second,  in  this  very  manner,  caused  flesh  to  collect  on  those 
bones  ; the  third,  in  this  same  way,  caused  skin  to  settle  on 
the  flesh  ; and,  the  fourth,  exactly  in  this  fashion,  caused  it 
(the  tiger)  to  live  : then,  he  (the  tiger)  exactly  on  rising  up 
devoured  these  four. 

Having  told  tfeis-much  tale,  the  demon  said,  O king,  which 
was  the  most  foolish  among  those  four  ? King  Bikram  said, 

who  caused  the  tiger  to  live,  he  exactly  was  the  most  foolish. 

/ 

And,  it  is  thus  said,  that  without  discretion,  science  is  of  no 
use;  but,  discretion  is  better  than  science  ; and  the  void  of  dis- 
cretion perish  in  like  manner  as  the  revivers  of  the  tiger  died. 


/ 


APPENDIX. 


lGl 


* 

Hr 

A 

COLLECTION 


OF 

SOME  OF  THE  MOST  USEFUL  VERBAL  ROOTS 

IN  THE 

HINDUSTANI  LANGUAGE, 

AU’HABETICALLY  ARRANGED. 


\ 


S/2 

& 

351 

| i Ip 

T v.  n.  come,  be. 

/o- 

yjl  v.  n.  rot,  putrify. 

v.n.  vomit. 

& 

JjI  v.  n.  boil. 

£ 

J*n? 

OP 

fy\  v.  a.  take  away,  steal. 

& 

A\  v.  n.  rise  up,  swell. 

A?  <J«T5 

Os  p 

^2jW.  n.  be  tired  of  business. 

f v.  n.  spring  up,  grow. 

s 9 

y\  v.  n.  be  rooted  out,  be 

skinned , be  pulled  out. 

v.  n.  become  musty,  rot. 

UjI  v.  a.  convert  to  thy  own 
me,  make  thy  oivn. 

j#\  v.n.  5ice//oM^(thebelly),  J? 

gormandize ; become  very 
rich. 

- 

v.  n.  boil  over.  & 

'9  T * 

y\  v.  n.  descend,  pass  over, 

jy 

go  off,  become  insipid,  fall 
in  value  or  dignity. 
v.  a.  overset,  turn  over.  Jf, 


Y 


162 


APPENDIX. 


dflv.n.  be  stopped  or  pre- 
vented, cease,  rest. 

J-Cl  v.  a.  guess,  judge,  think. 
32  fl  v.  n.  rise  up. 

Jj I v.  a.  ree/  ; lounge  (a 
horse). 

P 

3T3JJ(*  J>-\  v.  n.  become  desolate. 

P 

J-=-l  v.  n.  become  clean, shine.  \ 

c p 

L-H  v.  a.  n.  pour  or flow from 
one  vessel  into  another. 

P' 

<— o-l  v.  n.  be  separated,  slip, 
glance  off,  rebound. 

P 

v n.  separate;  be  spoken 
or  pronounced. 

P 

LiLL  v.  n.  rise,  be  raised. 

P 

J^-l  v.  n.  be  separated. 

O 9 

L-sL  v.  n.  be  thrown  up,  leap, 
bound,  spring  up. 


j\  v.  n.  stop,  hesitate 


v.  a, 


Hfl 

prop,  shelter.  m fl 


n 


U~ 


/' 


N 


j\  v.  n.  fly.  ^ 

X'  ^ 

Ujl  v.  a.  try,  prove.  fly 

P 

LI  v.  a.  winnow. 

P 

LI  v.  n.  breathe. 

y v.n.  bmi.  y 

fl  v.  n.  retreat,  shrink  jflf^ 

from. 

y v.  bon.  £ 

O p \ 

LI  v.n.  fret,  be  tired  of. 

Kl  v.n.  be  distracted, 

C 9 ....  I 

fl\  v.  n.  be  rooted  up. 

,sf|  v.  n.  grow,  rise.  ^fT  V 


a 

3 jLj!  v.  a.  liberate,  discharge. 


♦ v 

9IU71 


Uio!  v.  a.  halve,  divide. 


jn  v.  a.  spit  out ; refund. 
J/I  or  j fl\  v.  a.  watch. 

fl? 

jfl I v.  n.  &e  uncovered. 

<_^JT  v.  a.  the  voice. 

W 

ulJI  v.  n.  ie  reversed:  v.  a. 
pervert , subvert. 


fl 
> 


APPENDIX. 


16*3 


or  v.  n.  be  entangled, 

J 

he  involved:  v.a.  quarrel. 

/ warn 

Ox 

bJ;  v.  n.  doze,  be  drowsy. 

i-d  v.  n.  overflow,  be  poured 

out ; fall  (as  tears). 

0 ^ 

J\  v.  a.  bring. 

’ sfwiir 

c 

cUil  v.  n.  be  contained,  be  fi- 

led up  (a  well,  &c.). 

T*i) 

bs^l  v.  a.  raise,  take  up. 

o / 

lL0\  v.  n.  £<?  valued,  be  exa- 

mined, be  approved  of. 

o 

Ifl  v.  a.  bathe. 

<-b.l  v.a.  defend,  shelter  ; 

thrum  ; catch. 

v.  n.  boil;  consume  with 

rage  or  vexation. 

o 

v.  a.  put  on  (dress). 

0&&C 

cLif  v.  n.  vomit. 

9 

-f  v-  n miss,  err,  mistake. 

j0$iia 

CC/ 

v.a,  reverse;  spill. 

■Jjy  v.  n.  nod,  doze,  droop. 

/ 

,U1  v.  a.  paste.  & 

yb\  v.  n.  subside  (a  swelling 
or  inundation). 

-$2id  v.  n.  writhe , twist  : v.  a.  % 0* 
tighten. 

ff}  v.  a.  draw,  attract 


-*=-b  v a.  choose,  select.  *W,  /v 
v.  n.  /eaue  off : v.a  for-  an*'/ 
bid,  prohibit  : kindle. 
v.  a.  perfume.  ^ 

o 

JU-'b  v.  a.  share,  distribute. 

‘•^—1  v.  n. 

^ v.  a.  point  out,  shew. 

v.  n.  be  scattered,  be  final* 
sprinkled. 

LiU;  v=  n.  be  twisted,  be  di- 

vided ; v.a.  tivist.  . *■ 

& V.  a.  scatter,  sprinkle.  %31 


3? 


Y 2 


164 


APPENDIX. 


& 

v.  a.  collect , gather  up. 

• or  v.  n.  be  sounded,  sound. 

' /t. 

o 

^=sr  v.  n.  fee  ensnared,  stick. 

& 

f35 

-^sr  v.  n.  be  extinguished. 

£ 

^ v.  n.  fee  saved,  escape. 

fst*R 

Jjf'  v.  n.  consider,  think, 

comprehend. 

vl&£  v.  n.  fee  disappointed ; 

sprain ; run  away. 

f 

v.  n.  feewc?,  s/ip,  fereafe 

thy  promise. 

c 

v.  n.  fee  spread. 

9 c 

v.  n.  fee  separated. 

J&£%  v.  n.  fee  separated,  slip. 

tV- 

v.  a.  argue , dispute. 

(P 

v.  a.  give,  forgive. 

je 

?? 

jj  v.  a.  wager;  settle. 

^Wt 

,'jj  v.  a.  tear,  rend. 

y ^ ' 

V 

Jju  v.  a.  change,  alter. 

«fo* 

,».jo  v.  a.  screw  ; mock. 

Jjjj  v.  a.  laugh  at,  mock. 

c 

n±j  v.  a.  slay,  kill. 

J' 

s • 

or  |yj  v.  a.  wjocA*,  rex. 

f^TO  £. 

^ v.  n.  fee  splendid,  enjoy 

thyself,  live  at  ease. 

v.  a.  w,se. 

•jrP  v.  a.  forbid,  prohibit. 

v.  n.  rain. 

v.  n.  .sYop,  remain. 

o ^ 

Ur-j  v.  a.  bore. 

v.  a.  mutter,  talk  wora-<3^®|^[  ,//■■ 

sense  or  light-headedly. 

*j->  v.  n.  increase,  proceed, 

advance,  grow. 

✓ 

i^'V.  n.  abide,  dwell , 

peopled. 

dL~>  v.  a.  buy,  purchase. 

j—i  v.  n.  be  forgotten, 

be 

omitted. 

v.  n.  prate,  chatter. 

APPENDIX. 


1G5 


^ f*fv  uK?  V.  n.  be  sold,  sell . 

or  uJj  v.  n.  blow  or  expand 
(as  a flower). 

iJjfj  v.  a.  scratch , lacerate 
• toiVA  wai/s. 

uM?  v*  a'  Praise>  exPla'm- 

( v.  n*  scattered , be 

dishevelled ; be  angry. 
$ g*T?  jL  v.  n.  return;  be  spoiled. 
$ jjj  v.  n.  6e  spoiled ; quarrel. 

j\£i  v.  a.  season. 
f ^ S>.  v-  n.  burn. 

h v.  n.  vanish ; v.  a.  cawse 
/o  vanish,  dissipate. 

v.  n.  to  be  in  pain,  com- 
plain from  pain. 

^-b  v.  n.  be  pleased. 


0WQ, 


l^Jj  or  UL  v.  a.  allure,  tantalize. 
i_^Ib  v.  n.  tarry,  wait,  delay. 
v.  n.  climb,  ascend. 


cJf  v.  a.  look  at,  see. 

f 

^ v.  n.  become,  be,  be  pre- 

pared, be  made. 

• ’ ::  ^ 

j v.  a.  ftniV,  loeare ; v.  n. 

& 

&<?  picked. 

^ v.  a.  weave,  intertwine. 

Jj  v.  n.  be  read,  be  perused. 

CG^ 

JJCJ  V.  n.  be  tied , be  fastened. 

txj  v.  a.  sfmg  ; v.  n. 

fkn  Jf. 

JoreJ  or  pierced. 

*»  itu 

p v.  a.  50io. 

o >> 

v.  a.  understand,  com- 

f  & 

prehend,  think. 

• ** 

- 

G 

v.  a.  /oaeZ. 

4l35  / 

G 

tdp  v.  a.  wheedle. 

\jp  v.  n.  madden,  be  mad. 

9 • .7* 

v.  n.  dive,  drown,-  dtp. 

If  ^ 

9 

<jjy  v.  a powder,  grind. 

I**  ^ 

v.  n.  speak,  sound,  say 

„ c ^ 

ijjj  v.  n.  entwine,  twine. 

% ^ 

166  • 


APPENDIX. 


.'SRv 

Hits 

HJf 

H*t*l 

Hftsstl 

*x 

*£l? 

*3T! 


L s 

^ v.  n.  flow , float,  blow. 
v.  n suit,  fit. 

9 

f#  v.  a.  sweep,  gather. 

c 

v,  a.  speak,  call. 

<*Sfi  v.  n .flee,  run  away. 

o 

or  v.  a.  turn  on  a lathe, 
twist,  whirl,  brandish. 
CSfi-  v.  n.  be  enraged,  catch 
fire,  run  rapidly. 

cc 

\j##>  v.  n.  swell  (the  face,  he.). 

/O 

jJJfijJ  v.  n.  simmer,  bubble, 

* 

emit  steam,  boil. 
v.  n.  go  astray,  wander. 

o ** 

v.  n.  ebb  (the  tide),  de- 
scend a river. 

s 

ff.  v.  a.  worship,  adore. 
l«Xs^  v.  n.  be  astonished. 

s 

j$ 3 v.  a.  fill ; daub  ; heal. 

9 s 

j. # v.  n.  return,  come  back. 

9 

\j#  v.  a.  wheedle . 


y#  v.  n.  close,  be  joined. 
cJff  v.  n.  shrink,  be  scared , Mm 
bloum  into  a fiarne. 
or  u~e.  v*  11  • float. 
u Jfi:  v.  n .be  balked,  be  misled, 
stray  ; be  drunk. 
v-  a-} 

l eat,  devour,  stuff.  i~sg\ 

fie  v.  a.)  Qt[UV 

v.  a.  enjoy,  be  punished. 
v.  n.  be  amused, 
fil#  v.  n.  be  singed, 
ij#  v.  n.  be  parched,  grilled, 
fried,  broiled.  * 
v.  n.  buzz  (as  a fly). 

J v.  a.  worry,  bite. 

Is^j  v.  a.  change  {money).  ■>35511 

iXjfi  v.  n.  buzz,  swarm. 
v.  n .'enjoy,  suffer. 
v.  n.  forget,  err,  1 mis - 

■ . 

% w 

take,  omit,  stray. 


APPENDIX. 


G 9 

u-w v* n- ba,k  o d°g)- 

CJ> 'jj$  v.  n.  baric;  talk  foolishly. 

* G 

u_ v.  a.  <v#m/>,  Jr/ye  in. 
v.  a.  send,  transmit. 
or  v.  n.  be  wet. 
or  v-  a-  wee#,  y/,v/#. 

^|W  v.  n.  effect,  work,  act. 

'rZZJt  . 

*'  an^  iyJ  v.  a.  marry. 

-f~j  v.  n.  j>7#. 

^ v.  a.  sell. 
or  2-v.j  v.  a.  perforate. 

*)?>  enclose , impound 
J-j  v.  a.  ro//  om#3  laminate. 

G 

v.  a.  cm#  om#,  shape. 


b v.  a.  get,  find,  reach. 

G 

-f^b  v*  a*  inoculate. 

G 

u~jlj  v.  a.  manure. 

CG 

v.  n.  be  petrified. 

v.  a.,  trust,  believe. 


T*l 

ff-w* 

IJT'K 

q?- 


lf>7 

I 

cUj  v.  n.  be  roofed:  be  water- 
ed : be  paid  : be  filled. 
cUj  v.  n be  beaten,  be  dash- 
ed, be  thrashed. 

' 1 O • ' - V ' . - i • / Lr' 

/•X 

bib  v.  a.  cAwA,  throw  down 

with  violence,  knock. 

\ * 

✓G^  G ^ 

or  Ub  v.  a.  send. 

^ v.  n.  be  digested ; ro#  ; 
be  consumed,  labour. 
bib£  v.  n.  />e  squeezed  ; be 
shrivelled. 

G tCx 

b>~J  or  'aff  v.  n.  regret,  re- 
pent of. 

y Gy' 

'iff;  v.  n.  fall,  tumble  down. 

S’  y"  G 

J-rJ  or  v.  n slip,  slide. 
ib  or  f v.  n.  run  off,  fi.ee. 
\pv  v.  n.  be  painful. 

/■Oy 

b j v.  n.  smart. 

> v>v 

v.  n.  be  habituated. 

C/'y 

v.  a.  inspect,  examine. 


m 


*p 

.fcPT 

331 

* 

•ftp 

IT»P 


^TVfTT 

<ag|> 

«?«* 


APPENDIX. 


l6S 


v,  a.  take  up  dinner, 
serve  up,  distribute. 

u^'^j  v.  a.  reel  {thread,  fyc.). 

* 

Jj  v.  n.  fall,  lie  down,  re- 

SP 

pose,  drop. 

' Ls 

\jjjj  v.  n.  prate,  chatter: 

throb  {with  pain). 

0 s 

yft  v.  a.  read,  repeat,  say. 

v.  n.  be  ground,  be  pow- 
dered ; be  distressed. 

U v.  a.  5 Ami  (a  liquid). 

jFT L’ 

jL-j  v.  a.  spread,  distend. 

9 

X 

9 ' 

v.  a.  stitch. 

v.  n.  perspire,  melt; 

*§? 

compassionate. 

<** 

oJo  v.  n.  be  cooked,  be  ri- 

/lift 

/ 

pened ; be  turned  grey. 

W«t 

\ 

9 

jlG  v.  n.  call  out,  cry  out. 

v.  a.  lay  hold  on,  seize. 

c ^ 

ew*$ 

f£j  v.  a.  was/o 

s' 

\/j  v.  n.  ruminate,  chew  the 
cud.  | 


v.  n.  be  melted,  melt. 

Jj  v.  n.  be  reared,  thrive. 

v.  n.  be  bruised,  be  pres- 

sed; v.  a.  attack. 

v.  a.  saddle  {a,  horse,  8$c.). 

'WR 

c 

Lb  v.  a.  soften. 

cUb  v.  n.  return ; retreat; 

rebound;  change. 

v.  n.  adhere. 

fa* 

< v.  n.  thrive,  prosper 

o 

flourish,  shoot  forth. 

/ ' ^ 

c 

b-jj  v.  n.  twang,  whiz. 

fallen 

L uj  v.  a.  water,  irrigate. 

ejy  v.  a.  plaster,  besmear. 

v.  a.  adore,  idolatrize. 

9 

.As-.;  v.  a.  asA:,  inquire. 

iar 

Co  ^ o ^ 

ijujj  or  ijo  v.  n.  sleep. 

U**)  v.  a.  nourish,  bring  up. 


APPENDIX. 


169 


9i«' 

CO 

v.  a.  twpe. 

cLA^j  or  uUf>  v.  n.  be  torn, 

split,  rent,  broken. 

v.  a.  tear,  split,  break. 

Jul$j  v.  a.  jump  over  : im- 

prison, tie. 

w 

v.  n.  become,  befit,  fit. 

uJo^j  v.  a.  winnow,  dust;  v.  n. 

be  separated. 

o 

v.  a.  curse. 

o^  ^ 

v.  a.  know,  recognise. 

** 

v.  n.  tarn,  return,  roam. 

9T$n 

9 O 0^ 

v.  n.  tremble,  wave. 

0 ^ 

v.  a.  clean,  wipe,  settle. 

v.  n.  flutter,  vibrate. 

48 

or  v.  n.  be  entan- 

gled or  caught,  stick. 

aw 

9<*  O 9 

L.fr,~,gj  v.  n.  whisper. 

JS~4\  v.  n.  split,  burst,  break. 

9rtT*?l 

c / 

v.  a.  coax,  wheedle. 

J$j  v.  n .bear fruit, produce', 
be  fortunate. 

Sd  or  crtf  v*  a-  Put  on ’ 

wear,  dress. 

v.  n.  arrive. 

L.*- 

lWj  v.  n.  be  imprisoned. 

9 

v.  n.  be  broken,  be  burst , 
be  separated. 

O 9 . 9_ 

or  j v.  a.  Mott?. 

* 

J_j$j  v.  n.  blossom;  be  pleased. 
J-hjj  v.  n.  be  spread ; be  dif- 
fused or  expanded 
v.  n.  foam. 

o 

v.a.  rinse,  wash,  squeeze. 

c 

v.  a.  throw,  fling. 

v.  a.  drink ; smoke. 

c x 

v.  n.  enter,  pervade, 
j*!'  v.  n.  swim. 

J-j  v.  a.  press,  squeeze,  rack. 
U-j  v.  a.  sharpen. 


« a 

** 

**r 

to 

** 


z 


170 


APPENDIX. 


HI? 

HWlf 

F>  S 

qrr^t 

AS* 

?n; 

»ro 


Jo  v.  a.  free , rid,  absolve, 
fo  v.  a.  understand,  guess. 
CJo  or  C/l?  v.  a.  stare  at, 
look  at,  aim,  spy. 
v.  a.  thread. 

fa  v.  a.  heat,  blow  up  heat ; 

prove,  assay  : twist. 

^—so  v.  n.  heated,  glow, 
frisk  about ; be  glorified. 
iZJf  v.  n.  throb,  palpitate. 

op 

v.  n.  lisp. 

f v.  a.  abandon, quit,  leave. 
£ v.  n.  parch,  scorch. 

c s' 

v.  a.  collect  (a  tax)  ; op- 
press, afflict. 

Ji  v.  n.  pass  over ; be  saved, 
fi  v.  n.  swim. 

\j3  v.  n.  murmur,  grumble,  j 

. ' • 

v.  a.  cut,  clip,  shave. 


'9 

H^v.a.  sew , stitch . 

G G 

v.  a.  make  crooked  : v.  n. 
be  perverse,  be  affected. 

s' S’ 

jy>  v.  n.  long,  desire:  pity. 

G 

\r*f>  v.  n.  vibrate,  dazzle. 

Os*  ss' 

y.f  or  Lyy  v.  n.  flutter,  palpi- 
tate, be  agitated. 

*0  G 

v.  n.  flutter,  palpitate. 

s’  o * 

\jfijO  v . n . trickle,  drop,  pat- 
1 ter,  welter  : crack. 
oJp  v n.  be  cracked,  be  split. 

G 

Jfi  v.  a.  prove,  investigate. 
v.'a.  quilt,  stitch. 

Jj  v.  a.  fry. 

Os*  * 

~$J~;  or  v.  a.  flutter,  pal- 
pitate, be  restless. 

G 

LSj  v.  n.  shake. 

G 

Ui^*’  v.  n.  grow  re^  (m  the 
face),  glow,  sparkle. 


r*  4 

HBrWl 


APPENDIX. 


171 


fm 

^ v.  n.  extend,  stretch,  be 
pulled  tight. 

fljfl 

L“  v.  n.  twang. 

hsjJ  v.  n.  twang,  tingle. 

uJoJ  v.  n.  f utter,  throb. 

<_yy  v.  a.  bury,  cover. 

jy  v.  a break  ; change  (as 
money). 

Jy  or  Jy  v.  a.  weigh,  balance; 
confront  (as  two  armies). 

c 0 

v a.  support  ; shield, 
protect ; prevent ; stop. 

V 

[rff  v 11.  tremble,  quiver. 

or  CSy  v.  n.  be  tired. 

ilfiy  v.  n.  undulate,  shake. 

yu  v.  n.  stop  ; be  supported. 

t-yyj  v. a.  heap  up;  plaster. 

lLS*aJ  v.  a.  spit 

v.  a.  leave, forsake,  quit. 

<— >13  v.  n.  paw  with  the  fore 
feet  (as  a horse). 

c 

1— £il3  v a.  stitch. 

c 

v.  a hang  up  (by  a, 
string,  8$c.),  dangle. 
v.  a.  jump  over. 

CJf  v.  n.  drop  ; drip ; throb. 

Jy5  v a.  feel  for,  grope  for, 

« 

touch. 

c « 

\Jjjj  or  \jj  v.a.  chatter. 

fj  v.  n.  burst,  split,  crack. 
v.  n.  stop,  stay,  settle. 

o 

ffj  or  f v.  n.  roll. 

o 

v.  n.  melt,  rarefy. 

Jj  v.n.  give  way,  disappear. 

o 

jfuj  v.  a.  twang. 

9 

v.  n.  break,  break  forth. 
cJy  v.  a.  interrogate,  accost, 
challenge. 


Wf i 

wr 

ZT&fr 

:~pS 

1* 

US’ 


Z 2 


172 


APPENDIX. 


m 

3*1 

3*1 

33331 

ter* 

% 


o ? 

4^i*l:  v.  a peck,  nibble,  piddle. 
or  v-  a stuff,  warn. 
Jf  v.  a.  resolve,  settle. 
v.  a.  strike. 

C 

v.  a.  strike  ; harass. 

/0  . c 

or  v.  n.  be  numbed, 
be  chilled . 

v-*-;  v.  n.  freeze,  be  chilled. 
czJjj  v.  a.  cheat,  deceive. 

Jy  v.  n.  ?oo//c  about,  ramble, 
fj  v.  n.  be  fixed,  be  settled. 

" <x. 

v.  n.  jingle,  rattle. 
or  uiSfi  v.  n.  ,so/!>. 

o 

CSifi  or  v.  a.  strike,  knock, 
hammer;  drive  (a  stake), 
j-f  v.  n.  fixed,  be  settled. 
fJj  v.  a.  shove,  push. 

v.  a.  press,  squeeze,  feel, 
fi  v.  n,  roar  £o;  tawe. 

v,  n.  throb,  palpitate 


<&Jf>  v.  a.  prop,  support. 

Z. 

v.  n.  go,  pass. 

Jr 

—W-  v.  a.  implore,  beg,  want 

or  <*/U-  v.  n.  ie  awake. 

m 

fif-  v.  a.  know,  suppose,  trust. 

o 

v.  a.  examine,  try,  prove. 

v.  a.  repeat  the  name  of 

W 

God  internally. 

9 

v.  a.  close  with,  unite. 

TO 

9 

j>~  v.  n.  be  procured. 

j>-  v.  a.  shake  off,  join  ; 

*x 

stud,  set  jewels. 

• » jr 

9 

jf-  v.  n.  be  joined,  be  mended. 

m 

ffi  v.  a.  tighten,  bind,  tie. 

•33T5; 

Jl£>-  v,  a.  chew  the  cud. 

v.  n.  glitter,  glimmer. 

j=>-  or  v.  n.  burn. 

o 

v.  a,  be  indignant,  rage. 

33T33 

I*=*  v.  n.  germinate,  grow. 

JP* 

APPENDIX. 


173 


nq 

v.  n.  be  frozen  ; be  col- 

lected ; adhere. 

£S*>-  v.  n.  succeed,  go  on  well, 

fit ; be  assembled. 

4*TF1 

0 

v.  n.  gape,  yawn. 

^ v.  n.  be  delivered  (of 

child). 

-SWl 

0 j 

v.  n.  be  squeezed,  be 

pressed. 

^ v.  n.  be  born. 

v.  a.  yoke  ; plough,  till. 

m 

0 9 

,p-p-  v.  n.  fight ; be  killed  in 

battle. 

«t«s. 

1 

v.  a.  weigh. 

0 

cJOo-  v.  a.  ra<7. 

1 

jo-  v.  a.  expect,  look  out  for. 

•inT 

v.  a.  sweep,  shift,  clean. 

JL=~  v.  a.  polish  : solder. 

% 

v.  a.  wheedle,  seduce. 

^<jU  v.  a.  pee/?,  spy. 

v.  n.  take  a nap. 

-H«n 

v.  n.  snatch,  spring  on. 

CTilR 

✓✓ 

v.  n .fan ; spring ; urink. 

C/- 

v.  a.  wash,  rinse. 

aq-^n 

C/>  i> 

or  v.  a.  falsify, 

belie,  prove  to  be  false. 

v.  n.  shake,  touse : be- 

come lean. 

0 

v.  n.  star?,  startle. 

f 

j%>-  v.  n.  wither,  fade,  pine. 

O 0 

v.  n.  trickle,  rill. 

qwi 

s' 

j4>.  v.  n.  fall  off,  be  shed. 

v.  n.  fight  (as  cocks). 

CSfi=>-  v.  a.  brow-beat,  snap  at. 

v.  a.  chatter,  reflect,  la- 

ment. 

9 

CjUs-  v.  n.  nod,  bend  down  ; be 

angry  or  perplexed. 

or  jfitrT  v.  a.  shake. 

Ss' 

v.  n.  wrangle,  quarrel. 

SITS, 

t 


174 


APPENDIX. 


( 

3«t*l 

\ 

m 

*n, 

^ ■ 
& 

sfta; 

6f%ri 


Jf=-  v.  9..  fan,  move  (as  a fan): 
v.  n.  be  soldered,  mended. 

v.  n.  glitter , twinkle  ; be 
angry ; throb , ache , smar*. 

s'  P 

v.  n.  be  singed. 
u_<4=-  v.  n.  shine. 

L».L=-  v.  n.  twinkle. 
dS*A>-  v.  n.  glitter  i dance. 

o o 

v.  n.  be  peevish,  rage. 

s'  C Cy 

l-.irsT^  v.  n.  tinkle,  clink,  ring. 
v.  n.  tinkle,  clink,  ring. 

IsS 

v*  n*  tun  (in  the  sun). 

9 

JjSf-  v-  n.  swing,  dangle. 

9 

(*^e-  v-  n.  wave,  vibrate,  move 
loose ; slumber. 

c 

— v.  a.  cast,  push,  throw. 

'f-  or  c*-  v.  n.  live. 

S’  * ^ 

v.  a.  win,  conquer. 

''jf-rrr;  v-  a.  corrugate,  wrinkle. 


fc 

v.  a.  chew,  masticate. 
v.  a.  lick,  lap. 
v.  a.  plough. 

JU-  v.  a.  sift. 

o 

V'V  v‘  a*  join;  stuff,  cram, 
thrust  in,  press. 

G 

uL-JU-  v.  a.  press,  squeeze. 

v-  a>  desire,  love,  like, 
wish  for,  need. 

C 9 

v.  n.  be  stuck  into,  pier ce. 
‘rr-f"  V.  n.  be  abashed,  blush- 
stoop,  submit. 
v.  n.  be  fattened. 
v.  n.  stick,  adhere. 

9 9 

Lrr^'  v-  n-  keep  silence. 

c 

v-  n.  adhere,  cohere. 

" 9 s'  p 

°r  v.  a.  varnish,  pal- 
liate, anoint. 

is  s' 

]ter  v- a brazen,  falsify. 


*rer\ 

an* 

WS  ' 

- 

• kit 

Vi 

wa 

^51 


175 


\ 


APPENDIX. 


or  s-  v.  a.  see,  look  at. 
l^s-  v.  a.  apprize,  caution. 


*_.Co-  v.  n.  stick,  spread. 

v.  n.  collapse. 

^v.n.  be  painted. 

\ 

jU-=-  v.  a.  tear  to  pieces;  revile. 
Jlib-  or  lib-  v.  a.  wound. 
tv-  v.  n.  be  agitated,  wince. 
CJZf-  v.  n.  crackle,  crack,  split. 
v.  a.  suck  {a  dry  sub- 

\ . • 

stance). 

Ls?"  v. n.  squeak,  shriek,  bleat. 

IT  jj>-  v.  n.  graze. 

v.  n.  be  torn,  be  split. 

9 

' j^s-  v.  a.  steal. 

^ b V.  n.  burst ; ache,  smart. 

s'  c,  s 

v.  n.  smart. 

or  v.  n-  crackle, 

sputter,  chide. 

1T*I  v.  n.  chirp. 


9 9 s 9 

<zSj>-  or  cj^-  v-  n-  gabble. 

=m 

prate,  prattle. 

sfrft 

y>-  v.  n.  be  irritated. 

g 

v.  n,  palpitate,  throb. 

c ^ 

tjf-  v.  n.  ascend,  rise,  mount , 

advance,  attack ; ride. 

-X-s-  v.  n.  throb , pain. 

9 

lLXs-  v.  n.  be  finished ; be  ad- 

justed or  settled. 

jl£=-  v.  n.  squeak. . 

jXs-  v.  a.  masticate,  chew. 

c ^ 

K=-  v.  a.,  widen 

V 

G 

L£.=-  v.  a.  smooth,  polish. 

9<* 

v a.  weed. 

G Gy 

or  ^£s-  v.  a.  relish,  taste. 

9 

^Ss=-  v.  n.  pecA  (as  a bird). 

J^-  v.n.  move, blow  fiow, pass. 

is-  v.  n.  scream,  shriek. 

v y 

; 

G 

is^  v n.  shriek,  scream 

is^  v.  a.  itch,  titillate. 

176 


APPENDIX. 


4 k 


uXU-  v.  n.  glitter,  shine. 

raf-  M b>  M 

or  v.  n.  adhere. 

G 

v n.  grow  tough. 

CJUs-  v.  n glitter,  shine. 

G 9 

v.a.  coax,  sooth,  wheedle. 

It 

P 

^ v.  a.  gather , jracft,  choose. 

Ia4=-  v.  n.  be  playful,  be  wan- 

ton, be  restless. 

c 

L=4®-  v.  n.  scream,  squall. 

i^T 

G,G 

v.  n.  scream,  screech  (as 

an  elephant). 

1 

P 

o-  v.  n.  leak,  drip,  distil, 

drop  ; drop  (as  fruit). 

9 

v.  a.  break  to  atoms. 

\jy>-  v.  a.  widen,  expand. 

P 

v.  a.  suck. 

a 

CA=-  v.  n.  err,  miss , mistake. 

\ 4 

P 

v.  a.  kiss. 

3* 

GG 

.fjj®-  v.  a.  scratch,  claw. 

ifc.V'o*-  v,  n.  be  purblind,  be  dim 
of  sight. 

G O 

v.  n.  be  confused, 
amazed,  dazzled. 

c >- 

CS'jp>-  v.  n.  boggle,  start 

from  sleep. 

G 

££>yi>-  v.  a.  pricfr. 

v.  a.  thatch,  shade , roof  . 
v.  a.  embellish. 

s- 

v.  n.  thatch ; befit,  Jit. 

G 

v.  a.  f0/m7  : prune,  clip. 

c 

v.  a.  tether,  fasten,  tie. 

..G 

jiolr=>.  v.  a.  »o,  vomit,  emit. 

'•v  O * ' 


or  v 

>•  v V 


or 


v.  n.  be 


hidden,  lurk,  disappear. 
v.  n.  be  printed. 

G 

v.  a.  scatter,  spread. 
v.  n.  decay  : be  pruned. 

P 

v.  n.  be  adrift,  get  loose. 


m 

w\ 

%rRP 


12-3$®.  v.  n.  toss,  tumble  about. 


appendix. 


I 


v.  n.  be  scattered,  be 
spread,  be  dissipated. 

v-  n*  sing,  whistle,  war- 
ble (as  birds). 

c o 

v*  a-  conjure,  exorcise. 

fH 

v.  n.  pierced,  be  bored, 

v.  a.  sprinkle. 

iiim 

v*  n-  content,  be  sa- 

tiated : be  afflicted. 

uLC>=-  V.  n.  whistle  (as  birds). 

c ^ 

v.  a.  slap,  cuff. 

v.  n.  be  fatigued,  tire. 

v,  a.  deceive,  cheat. 

J~>-  v.  n.  be  skinned,  be  peel- 
ed, be  pared,  be  scraped. 

^ f' 

v.  n.  murmur. 

v.  n.  overflow,  be  spilt. 

v.  n glitter  : sound. 

(jff-  v.  n be  sifted,  strained 

1/7 


v.  n.  simmer:  sound. 

9 

^ v.  a.  touch,  feel,  meddle. 

9 

v.  n.  escape,  get  loose, 
cease,  he  discharged. 

v.  a.  let  go,  spare,  loose, 
emit,  emit  Jive  ; shoot. 
Jyff-  v.  a pare,  scrape'. 

9 

v.  a.  whitewash. 
i-vrf-  v.  a.  scatter,  sprinkle. 
jntff-  v a.  irritate,  vex,  abuse. 
v.  a.  snatch,  seize, pluck, 

pull,  tear,  rob. 


o 

dzif-  v.  a.  mince,  hack,  pound. 

c 

v a.  detain,  stop,  bar. 

(* 

v.  n.  sneeze 

v.  a.  remember,  think  of. 
v.  a rend,  tear. 
v n roar, scream  screech. 
js*~  v.  a.  rend,  split,  harrow. 

2 A 


15,  rx 

fits  ' 

4\ 


i 


178 


APPENDIX. 


t 


v.  a.  turn  (in  a lathe). 

ss 

v.  a.  expend ; sell. 

v.  a.  purchase,  buy. 

d 

c_;ta  v.  a.  jprm  tfoww,  squeeze. 

eta  v.  a.  cauterize ; fire  (a 

• r * ™ 

gun,  8$c.). 

jta  v.a.  thrash, tread(corn). 

c_>j  v.  n.  be  pressed  down,  be 

snubbed,  crouch,  shrink. 

v.  n.  crouch,  lie  in  am- 

bush, be  awed : twinkle. 

CU-o  v.  n.  gallop  : rebuke. 

9 

[id  v.  a.  prm  down,  snub. 

SS 

cJj*  v.  n.  rew7,  crack. 

fVsst 

o 

tajj  v.  a.  prove. 

S^' 

C 9' 

v.  n.  ache,  pain,  smart. 

**rc?n 

li'jcta  v.  n.  glow,  gleam. 

C 

v.a.  ,*  ve.r  ; cAiWe. 

Jj  v.  a.  grind  (coarsely)* 
split  (pulse,  8$c). 


}ta  v.  a.  agitate,  toss,  shake. 

l?n 

s Cts 

5jJ->  v.  n.  shake,  undulate. 

^<ta  v.  n glitter. 

v.  n.  glitter,  flash  : bend 

(with  elasticity). 

Uj  v.  n.  bend  ( with  elasti - 

m 

city). 

lLCcJ  v.  n.  s/uwe. 

IjjJj  v.  n.  be  contented,  live 

at  ease,  enjoy  thyself. 

Jjj  v.  a.  deny. 

jjii  v.  n.  run. 

% 

c 

or  v.  a.  accuse,  blame, 

tl* 

calumniate,  censure. 

Sjl>  v.  a.  ?n*7&. 

v.  n.  £wrn. 

taj  v.  n.  run,  wa/cc  Aasfe. 

*$!■ 

jlfcj  v.  a.  bear,  owe. 

i 

*unt 

APPENDIX. 


5??5 

Jlw  v.  n.  roar  (as  a tiger). 

c- 

, ,jUj*v.  a.  cowo/i  (as  a horse). 

Wlf 

jW  v.  n.  run , roam , run  at, 

attach,  trudge ; worship. 

^Ox'  or  uXs\>  v.  n.  «m/f,  give 
way  (as  a quagmire). 

+ C*  ** 

uXsjoso  v.  n,  £/aze. 

X 

v.  a.  place  ; give  in 
charge  ; seize , hold. 

un 

* 

v.  a.  owe . 

v.  a.  ybW,  double,  repeat. 

\jt<i  v.  a.  threaten . 

Cijw  v.  n.  palpitate. 

v.  n.  pierce , penetrate, 
enter,  be  stuck  into. 

tl&o  v.  n.  burnt;  be  ruined. 

f&rar^ 

jKjjo  v.  a.  reproach,  curse. 

oo 

V.  n.  palpitate. 

W%rt 

* 

JJjbJ  v.  a.  shove,  push,  jostle. 

V/itVT7?  v.  n.  roW,  wallow. 

no 


Jj&j  v n.  shake,  tremble,  fear. 

9 9 

b^sj  or  Lko  v.  a.  throw  dust ; 

winnow,  sift. 

lL,C*£J  v.  n.  throb ; palpitate, 

vm 

thump : glimmer,  flash. 

C ' 

v.  a.  threat,  chide,  snub. 

9 

v.  a.  cow 6,  car^  ; &caf. 

l&Juao  v.  a.  ^ncA’,  cheat. 

' 9 

v.  a.  carr?,  comb. 

,<*9 

Jlubd  v.  a.  season  {with  spices) . 

ptd  v.  a.  wash. 

9 

c-jysd  v.  a.  smear  with  pitch ; 

perfume. 

■ 

9 

v.  a.  ram,  stuff;  butt. 

or  v.  a.  thump,  slap. 

Ciifow 

v.  a.  Wow  (maVA  bellows). 

c,  ^ 

v.  a.  smoke. 

wpn 

t_cJ  v.  a.  give,  grant,  permit. 

o 

or  v.  n.  appear. 

O 

v.  a.  see. 

2 A 2 


\ 


180 


APPENDIX. 


ca  „ J 

oUX  or  c£/o  v.  a.  threat. 

iv* 

LijJ  or  <XI3  v.  a.  vomit. 

tlri. 

Jo  v.  a.  f/iroM?  dou;w,  fing, 

throw,  cast ; destroy. 

*>5  ' 

oi'j  v.  a.  y£we,  punish. 

v.  n.  Zwrn  to/YA  -s/;?7e,  be 

' _ J *. 

malicious;  be  fused. 

JX3  v.  n.  glitter. 

ft? 

\ 

<X3  v.  a.  .see;  o//n  a£,  /ooA-  af. 

cJLo  v.  n.  .sfo/?,  stand  still. 

iX 

.3  v.  n fear,  be  afraid. 

"N 

y 

^-3  v.  a.  bite  (as  a snake). 

5*^ 

.\>3  v.  n.  belch  ; bellow,  low. 

■ t 

h*i 

v.  n.  shrink;  shake,  move. 

?nifn 

XXS  v.  n.  shake  ; burn  clear 

or  brightly. 

$n?m 

\k  A> 

9 c 9 % 

\fX>  v.  n.  twinkle  : sound  (as 

a kettle  drum). 

' » 

f5  v.  n.  travel ; roll. 

lXf3  v.  n.  totter,  stagger. 

c ^ 

1X3  v.  a.  sting  (as  a reptile). 

iflpn 

JJ 

co.3  v.  n.  <f/t>e,  drown,  siuk. 

Jo  v.  n.  woye,  shake,  swing. 

b3  v.  a.  demolish,  raze. 

a? 

c 

v.  a.  cover,  conceal. 

C tf 

v.  a.  blame,  accuse. 

gfjbi*  or  jX3o  v.  a.  cover. 

c ^ 

l£*3  v.  a.  deceive,  disappoint. 

9 

JJoo  v.  n.  enter,  take  aim. 

J*3  v.  n.  &e  cas£  (metal),  be 

poured  out ; roll. 

5U&3  or  jXiO  v.  n.  ro//. 

I*U5  v.  n.  totter. 

ytS  v.  a.  carry. 

*r 

cJat$  v.  n.  shut,  close  : steal 

: 

* 

on,  approach : enter. 

v.  a.  drink,  gulp. 

c c p m 

iXys3  v.  a.  seek,  search  for. 

va 

APFENDIX. 


181 


J 


v.  a.  die,  stain. 

flif 

v.  n.  shine,  he  adorned. 

9 

l-!j  v.  n.  he  at  hay,  stop. 

mz 

CU-‘j  v.  n.  slip,  slide. 

iz 

JL'j  v.  a.  repeat,  iterate. 

TO 

_j  v.  n.  be  formed,  be  made: 

be  set  to  ivork  : stain. 

9 

— > v.  n.  be  agreeable,  excite 

desire. 

m 

9 

Lij  or  u* >j  v.  n.  he  displeas- 

ed, be  angry,  be  vexed. 

9 

CJj  v.  n.  he  stopped,  be  pre- 

vented, he  enclosed. 

o 

v.  a.  keep,  place,  possess. 

w? 

J f v.  a.  scour,  fret. 

-v-f,  v.  a pursue,  chase. 

Jj  v.  n.  be  mixed,  be  rolled. 

***, 

I*j  v.  n.  roam,  range. 

w 

v.  n.  cooked,  be  boiled. 

* 


or  v.  a.  colour. 

•j  v.  n.  cry,  grieve. 

ft 

<-  7 

-eLv  v*  n-  C00^  (it’iM  a 

S3 

friend),  quarrel. 

9 

or  LTJL'  v*  n-  be  dis- 

** 

pleased. 

J_jj  v.  a.  'plane,  polish, 

smooth  : select,  pick. 

o 

i— -vjj  v.  a.  plant,  transplant. 

tfq 

to  ^ 

v.  a.  trample,  ride  over. 

fra 

cc  7 

v.  a.  enclose,  surround ; 

watch,  v.  n.  be  confounded. 

»j  v.  n.  stop,  s^oy ; /iye. 

✓ ✓ 

l-Aj  v.  n.  be  pleased,  rejoice. 

or  i j v.  a.  fie;  thrum. 

tsf 

c 

^ v.  n.  Je  pleased . 

jjj  v.  a.  shove,  push,  rush. 

CO 

ajojj  v.  a.  cfress  {food),  cook. 

Of** 

c 

lL£~'j  v.  n.  irffy  (as  an  ass). 

% 

O 

v.  n.  creep,  plod. 

tor 

APPENDIX. 


18« 


snq 

or  u->L  t.  a.  curse. 

J V 

sm 

G 

*jL-  v.  a.  practise,  learn . 

yL>  v.  a.  mend,  perform. 

sin 

o 

or  v.  a.  shw/),  chide. 

sin 

JL  v.  a.  perforate,  bore : 

v.  n.  ache,  smart,  pain . 

Hin. 

v.  a.  hnead  {dough,  8$c.) ; 

sharpen,  whet. 

ti~>  v.  a.  tease,  fret,  trouble. 

cU-j  v.  n.  join,  unite,  stick. 

v.  n.  be  surprised. 

✓ x 

uJo-j  v.  n.  fee,  disappear. 

£-•  v.  n.  be  prepared ; ft. 

ffcon 

l^s-*  v.  a.  /on,  Jo//,  melt. 

HUl 

O ^ ' 

isjuj  v.  n.  be  fully  instructed. 

nvt 

G 

Ujuj  v.  a.  put  in  mind. 

G 

j'jsjwj  v.  n.  go,  depart,  set  off. 

y&ju-  v.  n.  be  correct,  be  mend- 

ed,  be  adorned,  be  adjusted. 


j~>  v.  n.  /;e  performed ; 

^ or  v.  a.  coo/;  se/  off, 

ftm 

set  afloat ; despatch. 

if  v.  a.  praise,  approve. 

v,  a.  create,  produce. 

* s' 

Li-s  or  'y-y--  v,  n.  crawl,  creep 

(as  a snake,  &c.). 

CJf  v.  n.  be  moved,  remove. 

an* 

✓ 

v.n.  ro/ ; ferment. 

s'  P 

v,  n.  sip . 

v.  a.  swallow  by  gulps . 

G / G ^ 

1 — * or  '.i ... V-  n,  rest. 

<.  > 

v.  n.  foss  (as  a snake). 

nwt 

CS = v.  n.  so&. 

ulCi  v.  n.  be  able. 

yK-j  v,  a.  accept  ( a bill,  8$c.). 

or  v.  n.  fear , be  in 

e c 

awe,  be  abashed. 

G ^ 

v.  a.  straiten ; cause  to 

HoRTl 

accept  (a  bill , 8$c.). 


APPENDIX. 


183 


ms 

/ / 

jLj  v.  n.  shrink,  draw  in. 

G **  _ 

v.  a.  A-///,  mak&away. 

*\ 

jfi~>  v.  n.  shrink,  contract 

^ v.  n.  ,*  die. 

T*h 

TZyrF 

shrivel,  wrinkle. 

Jj-j  v.  a.  /ry,  prove . 

v.  a.  tighten , straiten. 

G 

v.  n.  become,  befit. 

of' 

v.  a.  be  unravelled,  be 

9 

v.  n.  s/ee/?. 

disentangled. 

* 

v.  n.  swell,  rise. 

m 

s9 

<^JL,  v.  n.  light,  be  hindled. 

G 

v.  n.  visible,  be  seen. 

«?n 

U-)  v.  n.  be  contained  in. 

v.  a.  consider,  meditate. 

TIH^ 

v.  n.  be  supported,  held 

0 9 9 

or  cSy*  v.  n.  become  dry; 

m 

up,  protected,  shielded. 

shrivel,  pine  away. 

Fft 

ftmz 

cU/k~j  v.  n.  contract,  shrink. 

G 

v.  a.  absorb,  soak  up. 

-t. s v.  a.  comprehend,  under- 

G 

i J.-o  v.  a.  commit,  entrust. 

stand,  know. 

0,0  p 

-y*>  v.  a.  smell. 

W* 

v.  a.  remember,  mention. 

•Jfj-j  v.  n.  become,  beseem  : 

9 

^ v.  a.  hear. 

v.  a.  weecZ. 

53R 

****** 

v.  a.  blow  the  nose. 

^ v.  a.  bear,  endure . 

B7. 

w*5*H 

G ^ 

v.  a.  beckon,  hint,  wink. 

v.  n.  shiver  (with  cold). 

B>>s^ 

v.  a.  adorn,  decorate. 

0 

L^.-  v.  a.  Zire,  £ease,  tickle. 

SW 

v.  n.  be  dressed,  deco- 

O  G ^ 

or  v.  n.  have  the  hair 

rated,  adorned,  adjusted. 

stand  on  end,  thrill. 

184 


APPENDIX. 


" / 

jjf>  v.  a.  trail,  drag. 

v.  a.  tickle,  stroke. 

v.  n . fear,  be  afraid. 

z^r3  v.  a.  try  : adjust : pro- 

* 

vide. 

^j-s  v.  a.  sew,  stitch. 

z^  v.  n.  exude  : seeth,  boil. 

O 

or  ^ v.  a.  water. 

v.  a.  learn,  acquire . 

%'H 

O'  O 

or  v.  a.  adjust. 

*> 

0 

v.  a,  mine. 

<j 

v.  a,,  toast,  warm. 

v.  a.  incubate,  hatch, 

brood ; attend  on. 

O' 

v.  a.  whisk. 

LS1 

7iT»Jn 

• 

O' 

v.  n.  be  ashamed. 

* ft*  i 

1—3 

^rfrr 

O' 

Uj  v.  a.  order,  command. 

O C 

i ■&  or  < JlS  v.  n.  shiver, 

* 

tremble,  quake,  shake. 

o 

jj\£  v.  a.  tread,  trample. 

oo 

v.  n.  grunt. 

\zz-£  v.  n.  £e  .s/m/m. 

jd>  v.  a.  cm/,  cm/  out. 

'9 

jd.  v.  a.  cut  {with  the  teeth). 

v.  n.  be  cut;  be  abashed, 

"\ 

stopped ; die  of  wounds. 

dSf  v.  n.  sprain,  twist;  pain. 

v.  n.  swarm  : be  gritty. 

Is v.  n.  gnash  the  teeth. 

9 

Sf  v.  n.  bruise,  crush. 

•if3  v.  n.  be  washed. 

. 

Lsr  v.  n.  be  afraid,  shrink. 

\jd>  v.  n .frisk,  leap,  caper. 

' 9 

oJJi  v.  n.  frisk. 

f v.  a.  do,  make,  practise. 

\j  v.  n.  be  hard  or  stijf'. 

APPENDIX. 


185 


ff  v.  n. 

*T$TT  4 v* *■ 

I//  v.  n. 

VfSs& 

\ fitPi  J:'J  V.  a. 

^ v.  n. 

L J*  fc*  ' * 91*  9 

:j  w v "• 

v.  n. 

A><v-n- 

ffv.n. 


_i  v. a. 


cc2v.d. 

l2v.a. 


v.  a. 


v.  n. 

^■?n  '-  '■  a. 

ftrJfSfl  $ V-  n. 

v.  n. 
v-  n- 

y*i£isn  v.  n. 

V ^ v.  a. 


groan,  sigh. 
strain,spra  in , break, 
grate , be  gritty, 
poke. 

crack,  thunder, 
cluck  : murmur. 


gnash  the  teeth. 


be  drawn,  be  pulled, 
grieve,  mourn, pine, 
tighten : assay,  try. 
suffer  pain , pain, 
cover  with  a shroud, 
scoop,  excavate, 
shriek,  scream, 
parch  grain), 
itch  , fidget , writhe, 
be  grieved 
be  peevish,  snarl, 
blossom,  bloom, 
earn,  work : lessen. 


c cp 

Iff  v.  n.  wither,  droop,  blast. 

ec  ^ 

L&xi  v.  a.  shoulder. 

9 

v.  a.  value,  appraise. 

9 

v.  a.  pound,  beat,  cudgel. 

9 

ff  v.  n,  leap,  jump,  rejoice. 
j<£  v.  a.  dig  out,  excavate. 
v.  a.  curse. 

9 

o'/  v,  n.  sob,  cry,  scream  : 
v.  a.  wind  up(a  watch, 8$c.). 
ff  v.  a.  embrace. 

c 

v a.  prick,  stab,  gore. 

oc  ^ 

sojfi  v.  n.  lighten,  flash. 

c ^ 

ff  v.  a.  tell,  say,  bid , order. 
If  v.a  eat ; embezzle ; get. 

mO 

isff  .v  a.  pound  : excavate. 

c 

ff  v n.  cough 

C 9 9 

or  v.  a.  affect,  pe- 
netrate : adorn. 
v.  n.  be  dried  up  : sell, 

go  off:  remain,  join . 

2 B 


f>¥?n 

V 

-y 

p 

\/ 

ten 

m;  iti 

■ mh 

TS\\ 


» 


186 


APPENDIX. 


djkj  v.  n.  rankle , offend. 

v.  a.  nibble  : doubt. 

✓CO/' 

v.  n.  knock,  rap,  tap 

\s^  v.  n.  ?7c7i,  scratch,  tickle. 

° ° ✓ ° / 

%st*  or  Vfsr  v.  u.fret,  be  vexed. 

v.  n Se  drawn,  be  pulled. 

2>gf>  v.  a.  pursue,  hunt. 

(Hd 

v.  a.  scrape. 

~*j4  or  v.  a.  scratch. 

j'Jtyf  v.  a.  sweep. 

CJjf  v.  n.  clang, rustle, rattle. 

c c 

v.  a.  creak,  clatter,  jar  ; 
grind  the  teeth  ; snore. 

Lrf  or  v n.  sink,  drop  off. 

or  v.  n stir,  slip. 

v.  a pull,  tear,  scratch. 

v.  n grin. 

* 

v.n.  be  opened;  clear  up. 

v.  n.  blow  (as  a flower)  ; 
be  delighted,  laugh. 

\ 


If  v.  a.  parch;  v.  n.  wither. 

LJ^  v.  n.  boil. 

v.  n.  laugh  out,  titter. 
v.  a.  skin,  flea. 
v a.  refute.  VflS 

v.  a scatter. 

^ + j;  t 

jff  v.  a.  expectorate,  hem - 

J'tuf  v.  a.  was/i,  r/wA'e. 

v.  a.  lose,  get  rid  of. 

Cbf  v.  a.  pluck,  pick. 

v.  a.  search  for,  inquire. 
v.  a.  rf/g,  delve ; search. 

\pij4  v.  n.  trot. 
v.  n.  5o«7. 

U»J«/  or-^^  v.  a.  thrust,  stuff. 


fjjf  v.  n.  cough. 


vf 


v.  n.  be  angry,  be  vexed. 
v.  a.  run  after,  persecute, 
j-rf  v.  n.  grin. 

v.  a.  play , sport. 


: ^ 


A PPE 

^*1 

c c ^ o 

or  or  pull,  draw. 

mf  gr-f 

v.  a.  row,  paddle;  suffer. 

ha 

,fjr^ 

v.  a.  purchase,  buy. 

tlf' 

in  ift 

\S 

b v.  a.  sing. 

ff  v.  n.  roar,  thunder. 

mff* 

ff  v.  a.  strain,  squeeze. 

CO  ^ 

v.  a.  tie,  join,  stitch. 

**!$& 

o 

v.  a.  pierce,  transfix,  spit. 

-'b  v.  a.  ctf//c ; thrash ; seek. 

n4t' 

or  v.  a thrust,  pierce. 

^ • • . 

-#>  v.  n.  join,  unite,  collude. 

'asjo  v.  a.  tickle,  titillate. 

v.  n.  pass,  omit ; die. 

laaa 

J'ff  v.  a.  present,  offer. 

'fit ft* 

J>  v.  n.  fall,  drop  ; be  spit. 

ma  ■ 

v.  n.  thunder,  roar. 

nm- 

v.  n.  snarl. 

mvrfi 

\J>ff  v.  n.  gargle  ; roar,  roll. 

*f~r 

jS  v.  n.  penetrate,  be  driven 

in,  be  set ; be  buried. 


N I)  I X.  187 

v.  n.  thunder,  rumble. 


\ffff  v.  n.  rumble  (the  bowelsV 

ns’J?) 

^o  ^ 

ffff  v,  a.  beseech,  implore. 

C x 

v.  a.  mulleute  ; form. 

iff  v.  n.  melt,  be  dissolved. 

Lli  v a.  abuse  ; force  food 

&c.  down  the  throat. 

ff  v.  a.  count,  number. 

fo«i 

li&b"  v.  n.  snuffle,  snivel. 

n*W 

v.  a.  /ose,  waste,  spend. 

or  v.  a thread, 

qsjs  T 

plait,  stitch  ; put  on  a spit. 

v.  a catch,  seize. 

u'.f  or  Jjf  prick,  puncture. 

itl^' 

or  i<j.r  knead  : plait. 

>iH  » 

jf  v.  a.  rf/g,  scrape. 

c »> 

v.  n.  resound  hum,  buzz. 

’in  - 

-h/  v.  a.  take,  seize  : blush. 

«tc*  -• 

Jl^T  v.  a.  rw/rc  : thrust  in. 

jrfi  v.  n.  be  confused. 

wi 

2 B 2 

188 


APPENDIX. 


✓ 


vs 

ggfj  v.  n.  abate,  decrease. 

*11 

j£  v.  n.  be  surrounded,  be 
enclosed ; gather  (clouds). 

\>j4  v.  n.  snore. 

Gw; 

\j-4  or  v.  n.  be  rubbed; 

v.  a.  rub ; beat. 

9^  , 

u~4  v.  n,  be  thrust  in,  enter. 

mi 

LlUw^f  v.  n.  be  dragged,  trail. 

c 

Lgfi  v.  n falter,  fawn,  coax. 

Jf  v.n.  dissolve  ; mellow. 

v.  a.  bask  in  the  sun. 

v.  n.  be  hoarse. 

l '*$4  V.  n.  jingle,  ring. 

J *4^4  v.  a rinse,  stir  (a  liquid). 

W 

(JUi^T  or  <JL^v  a.  gw//?,  drink. 

^ft? 

v.  a.  /?/orf:  shave. 

n 

jjf  v.  a.  stare  at,  frown  at. 

1*^  v.  n.  go  round,  turn . ro//. 

Sfr 

v.  a.  polish  : strangle. 

jff  v.  n.  thunder. 

H 

v.  a,  m?‘x,  mingle  (paste). 

U 

5 v.  n.  bring;  produce. 

sn 

tJU-J  v.  n.  cling,  stick,  adhere. 

v.*.  wrap  up  fold, spread. 

'T  t 

O/  o 

J^i!  or  v.  n />e  draggled. 

LJ  v.  a.  foc/r. 

cUl  v.  n . be  plundered. 

l5-Sl  v.  n.  stagger,  trip. 

mm 

/•/' 

v.  n.  hang,  dangle. 

Gx* 

Lfl  v.  a.  cudgel,  belabour. 

afon 

y v,  n.  blush,  be  ashamed. 

. 

^•G  . 

v.  n.  soften. 

Ur  or  ^ v.  n.  bend. 

•±C<  v.  n.  spring,  bend. 

v.  a.  jolt,  strain. 

iagan 

'<  ' 

[J-s?  v.  n.  be  clammy,  elastick. 

V 

5»35f?T 

oJ  v.  n.  be  loaded,  be  laden. 

51  Jf 

j)  v.  n shake,  tremble. 

p v.  n.  fight,  quarrel. 

51? 

x'GC  x 

tr  v.  n.  stammer : 

5IT73T] 

stagger. 


APPENDIX, 


189 


w ^c  p c/; 

^jJ  or  CSff>  or  fp  v,  n. 

roll , fall  off,  slide. 

rfHw 

LjJ  v.  a.  thread , string. 

5W5WI 

✓ c ^ 

LU  v.  n.  be  clammy  or  glu- 

f* 

tinous  ; agglutinate. 

fora 

G 

«g£J  v.  a.  write. 

ara 

v.  a.  look  at ; perceive. 

G^C  G-*' 

v.  n.  gasp,  pant . 

an  * 

<*S-  v.  n.  be  applied ; begin. 

jpsrai 

Ls^  v.  n.  long ; v.  a.  cause  to 

if 

long,  tantalize,  covet. 

ww?n^ 

O/ 

jlO]  v.  a.  call ; challenge. 

afosn 

U!  v a.  coax,  beg  : redden. 

«*5 

L*!  v.  a.  lengthen. 

#9N 

CC/' 

v.  n limp. 

G 

4>»!  v.  n.  fee  enamoured. 

5ft?  * 

f 

c3j!  v.  n.  wallow,  roll  about. 

%',: 

t3j!  v.  n.  tfwrw  over  or  feac/i:. 

<3j!  v.  a.  plunder  ; squander. 

m, 

c/jl  v.  a.  catch. 

CSi  v.  n.  shine,  fash,  lighten. 

. c>. 

nJ  v.  n,  answer,  avail ; get. 

a** 

G - 

^ v.  n.  tantalize:  undulate. 

CS^ J v.  n.  warble:  glitter. 

f v.  a.  take,  get,  receive. 

or  u—J  v.  a.  plaster. 

GiU*S  v.  n.  repose,  lie  down. 

V 1 |r  i 

L—J  v.  a.  plaster,  daub,  smear. 

JJ  v.  a swallow,  gulp. 

r 

V 

<— >U  v.  a.  measure. 

ff>  v.  a.  smite,  beat,  kill. 

,jle  v.  a.  believe,  allow,  obey. 

G 

v.  a.  scour,  scrub,  clean. 

4,g 

<iiL  v.  a.  rwfe,  tread : starch. 

wr? 

« 

G 

Cg&U  v.  a.  /or,  require. 

\r*  v.  a.  persuade. 

G ^ 

v.  a.  churn ; knead. 

1% 

v.  n.  fee  effaced,  expire. 

uJoU  v.  n.  unnft,  og/e,  coquet. 

190 


APPENDIX 


qfttl 

LiU  v.  n.  wink  at,  connive  at. 

*1? 

^ v.  n.  be  made  or  produced. 

to* 

^ v.  n.  shut,  close. 

c 

jbLr«  v.  a.  rinse. 

Jos*  v.  n.  be  perverse. 

• »•  c *" 

v.  n.  creak,  crack. 

jysr°  v.  a.  fwis#,  break. 

yc  or y<  v.n.  die,  expire. 

nvn 

co  p 

1^-^  v.  n.  wither,  droop,  pine. 

c / 

v.  n.  twist,  writhe. 

jjyo  v.  a.  twist,  writhe,  gripe. 

*ter 

P 

v.  n.  back , be  twisted. 

*rs» 

G ^ 

v.  a.  cover,  line,  gild. 

c / 

Ljsj^  v n.  fee  twisted,  writhe. 

qf^T! 

• 

bj*>  v.  a.  paste. 

pep  e p 

\f. — < or  L — < v.  n.  smile,  grin. 

CS — « v.  n.  be  torn,  rent,  split. 

J — o v.  a.  crush,  bruise , break. 

W 

s'  P 

JL*>  v.  a.  deny. 

v.  a.  rub,  anoint. 

J~'V.  r\.  meet,  occur, be  mixed. 

c >- 

v.  n.  be  shut,  be  closed. 

Mc  ? 

iL*  v.  n.  be  shaved. 
bli*  v.  a.  starch. 

P 

c^yc  v.  n.  make  water. 

P 

v.  a.  pilfer,  steal,  rob. 

J jo  v.  n bloom  ; intoxicate. 

t*' 

iy  v.  a.  allure,  fascinate.  f-J 

-asc  v.  a.  churn. 

v n*  odour. 

^ v.  a.  rub  ( with  the  hands). 
v.  a.  grind : tweak. 


*? 

«f?*H 


v.  n.  bleat  (a  kid). 


<— >b  v.  -a.  measure,  weigh. 

-.'j  v.  n.  dance. 

V*. 

CO 

jjjb  or  ob  v.  a.  begin. 

C> 

c 

ijU  v.  a.  7/oA:e. 

0,0 

v.  a.  crow,  leap  over. 

J- j v.n.  be  ended, performed. 


■*h 

W<J* 

jn^ 


APPENDIX. 


191 


;;>%r 

Grew 


*?%J7 

«**% 

fojif 

% 

5*^1 


G 

v.n.  serve, be  performed. 
LiU-j  v.  n.  be  settled,  decided. 

o 

v. a./>OM/-o^(clear water). 

c 

l^sT  v.  a.  spy,  espy. 
dj*&=f  v.  a.  twitch. 

v.  a.  wring,  squeeze  out. 

o c - 

f. \y  or  fy  v.  a.  spy,  look  at. 
LJ  v,  a.  spoil,  destroy. 

Jij  v.  a.  refuse. 

JiJ>  v.  n issue, go  or  come  out. 

c 

or  v.  a grin. 
v.  n.  be  skinned,  cleaned. 


LiO  v.  a claw,  scratch. 

g ^ 

Ls>-'  v.  n.  approach. 

J&  v.  a.  swallow , gulp  down. 
Sifj  v.  a,  quilt. 

L*j  v.  a.  strengthen,  better. 

y v.n.  ferae?,  A’foojo  ; obey. 
~y  v.  a.  pinch, scratch, claw. 
or  If  v.  n.  bathe,  ivash. 


Jf  v.  a.  /ooft  watch,  spy. 

9 ,9 

or^j  v.  n.  ferae?,  -s/oojb. 

c 

or  jlJ  v.  n.  sleep. 

o 

joJ  v.  a.  deny  : blame . 

jji  V.  D,  Stoop. 

w 

Ujf  or  LUyj  v.  a.  invite. 

wji 

3 

J\j  v.  a.  go  round ; sacrifice. 

c 

r* 

✓ 

v.  a.  deceive,  inveigle. 

*f»«n 

G G ^ 

^j_y  v.  a.  .yfora. 

% 

& 

jls>  v.  n.  /ove,  fe  overcome. 

>1*  s 

m 

G Ox*  GO 

or  v.  n.  gara?. 

•#  ^ 

Ail*  v.  n.  wander,  ramble. 

m 

G 

v,  a.  drive  : bawl  to. 

c ^ 

Lfjb  v.  a.  seize. 

u_£l&  or  Li U&  v.  n.  be  driven 

back,  retire,  shrink. 

jgsa  v.  n.  hurry. 

i-Sf  v.  n.  drawback , waver. 

IN?) 

m 


APPENDIX. 


lusf  v.  a.  jolt. 

c 

\<£s*  v.  n.  hesitate,  falter. 

- M 

bus  v.  n.  hesitate,  boggle. 

f 

jb  v.  a.  take  by  force,  steal. 

ft,  v.  a.  win,  beat ; weary. 

fat* 

^ v.  a.  lose,  mi  day. 

v.  n.  stop;  be  scorched. 

zm 

c ✓✓ 

Jys  v.  n.  bloom,  be  delighted. 

bys  v.  n.  become  green. 

swftl 

sx*  s-  ✓ C/» 

iJjs  or  hjJJs  v.  n.  hurry. 

issji 

Vjjsys  v.  n.  shudder:  crash. 

iwpsn 

C,  X 

Kjs  v.  n stammer,  stutter. 

fa* 

Jjs  v.  n.  shake,  move:  tame. 

grwr 

. — Jjs  v.  n.  toss  or  tumbieabout. 

7 

nm 

* ? 

v.  n.  rejoice,  be  pleased. 

O 9 

J-\l*  v.  a.  fe£  on,  instigate. 

jf JS  V. 
V. 
V. 

LJjs  v. 
Life  v. 
uXo  v. 
V- 


. *JUS  V 

J J 

l*Jb  V 


J 


l£jS  V. 


a.  agitate:  v.  n.  wave. 
n.  biliow,  wave. 
n.  be  hung  on,  stick. 
n.  a.  shake,  tremble. 
n.  nauseate. 
n.  assault,  stretch  on. 
a.  kill,  strike,  smite. 
a.  puddle. 
a banish,  expel. 
a laugh. 

a drive  away  : call. 


luUS  V. 


n.  neigh. 


pt>  v 


v 


us  v. 
Jus  v. 

c 

.l£iUS  V 


n.  6e,  become. 

a.  goarf,  thrust,  stab. 
a.  look  after  i pursue. 
n.  swim. 
ti.  low,  bellow. 


THE  END. 


; c 

<1 


■ft 


LONDON: 

Printed  by  Cox  and  Baylis,  Great  Qjeen  Street. 
Lincoln’s- Jnr.-Fieidr. 


•Rfswt 

mb 


pflRT 


P]fi3liS3A^N  W K ][  W'A ' 1 N (4  , 


1 


Swcbinc  rtf 


2 


■>fv/ olsstvc,  sc 


S' watne.  3c., 


4 


jf  W'j.rne,  Jr, 


Th  m ZEij]i_3Mjbxtt:^ 

Of  the  E) e \rA~N agaei.  ('hahactbr, 


$ $■«* 


5 SK 


<\ 


♦ 

♦ 


r lYCE  ]R3  <C  A 1a  Fl  GIT  IK  S „ 


^ t,  <Q 


L*  V'iltcutjJ^LJ).  F. nyif 


Tho  dots 


,10  ' , 20-  s 300 

yV/t'  Qv  . 


fhcw  the  I'fjfinriui,? . 


En«ra''d  bit  J’.S’.v, 


T 111  K I J Ki  \'A>'A'TiA;K1  A IiP HAB ET. 


Vowels  . 

Ini  rials.  Finals 


Confon  ants. 


31  511  - 1 ^ 71  ^ 3 

r"j ; i ^9.^a'  if/  SI'*  ^ 


pi.n 

♦ 

ruj 


n9 


tu  ^Lt  H*.  ^ ^bdh 

V . 


% 

fo'i  ^ /*  ^ a ^ ^ 


/ 


/ 


ai  c al  V ^ 

tA 


371  ^ 3o 

Initials  and  Final  Vowels  with  a Consonant . 

SR.3TRH 


/ 


A 


Other  Toms.  ~ 

^^3^3F?J1TT3T1  ^T  %T  3T  7iT7I 

•i  e ai  o au  o 

TTTR^SJ*? 


a tz  n ri  ri  e ai  o 


au  Jh  7T 


bh  bh  l s'  s 


C Vitkins  LLD  TRS  Scrip* 


Kr\  <jr-jvd  Vtf  J.  Swa  1 1 


/ 


. : , ,, 

P s'  1 


v 


«>  ^ 


I4f 


: ; • ■ • " ' ;- 

* ~ fan  Nil 


V o M :i  J o nw  3 j C or?  s owajn  t s . 


Doulile  ^Letters. 


run. 


cRT  : 

X-  >1  }j  km  a’v  /£/•  /-/  X-w  /'.'//  khn 


^ ^ 7®^  jTT  '3^T73?  t 

khm  khv  Jchr  tchw  lefts  fchs  q y y q h yj 

H 7«R  37IJ 3^f  Tr^^o|5^ 

q/'h  qd  qdh  qn  yb  $m  Oy  y*  yl  <PV  yh 


qhn 


' qhm 


qhv 


rule  nqq 


*♦  «-*♦  *L* 

n.u/h  nynq  nqlch ■■ 


nys 


eh  oh  chch'h  ohm  chv  chv  chvr  ch'hm  eh.  h y eh  hr 


nj  nch  nchh  n;h  tin  tt  tth  tm  ty  tr  thm  thy  thr 

V^T^TkW^  s?V<]re.TOP 

dp  dpli  t id  dn  dbh  dm  dy  dr  dl  dw  dhm  dhv  dhr  nt  nth  nd 

n d h tin  nh  th  lick  tt  tth  In  ty  tfi/i  tm 

^ <R  ^ ^ 

ty  tr  tw  ts  thn  thm  thy  thw  do  dqh 


fOMPOJTMB  C ONSO'^  ANTS. 


Doteble  Letters  Continued  . 


PI.  IV. 


\?n 

dd  ddh  dn  did  dm  di/  dr  dw  dim  dhm  dhu  dhr 

* *• 

'rjz\  «?T  ^ ^ 

dhw  71 1c  nch  nt  nth  nd  mt  ndh  71/1  7 ijih  71777 

^ ^ tq  1R: 

72  7/  nr  nw  77  s nh  jit  p 72  pp  pm  yiq  p 7- 

pi  pw  ps  p/iTn  pin/  phw  bp  by  btb  bd/t  b7i 

W ^ I 

in  bill  frm  bi/  hr  hi  ' bw  bhn  bhm  bhiy  bhr 


M/  <*/W  772  ?i  mp  mph  mb  mhh  mm  7777 / wr  ?» / 

°f\  rit  if 

ww  rk  vkh  rq  &i * Ik  hy  It  l/i  liy  // 

sch  sch'h  .1 ‘77t  sn  sr  si  ,>-vr  ss  shk  shkh 

^ ^ ^ 

she  shth  shn  sh/i  sh/ih  shm  shy  shw  shsh  sJc 

Sfh  Sph  S7/L  sy  sr  si 


skh  st  sth 


^sT^jasj?,  j; 


JW  ss 


hn.  hm  hy  hr  hi  iti  subham  1/huyd.t. ' 


Com  p © iT  >'  i ) <T  ots'  ^ a t s , 


Double  Letters  Continued. 

• ; . PI . V. 

333  ifjfHiB  9®s®sjs5§ 

kki/  Aty  Atr  ktru  7ihv 

ffM  JftVM  4^-1  ^3  ^3 

A1//?/  Tcshn  Jeshry  Tcshni  kshmir  Jtshu  kshr  kshw 

raqjTqjvztuqjzj 

/•»•/(/  ,/dd/i  <?  ri/  q d 1/  qdh  i/  qdliw  qnv  q bln/  q miy  qry 

^3  s3s3 

qhry  chrhy  chchhi / ehehhr  chchhw  jj y / /w  / ny 


<f  hhi/  dlxhr  dniy  dry  dviy  dvr  dliry  yity  ?i  tr  n try  nhr 


ntvy  nts  ntsy  ntsw  ntlni  n rliw  ndv  ndv  ndw 


nd  h m ndhy  nd  hw  nmi / nmv  pry  jilt/  fifth  p r in  pry 


mm/  mpsiy  mhiy  mtJn/  hyy  Ipl  Iptiy  Ipsm  sixthly 


^ W\  tr«l  *MM 

sh  ri  if  f~ky  sly  s'lry  shv  sp  lip  svy  hny 

i M it  kins.  L'LD.  TJi’S . Scrip  f Enqravd  by  J.Swamt . 


■ 


m 


• • 


‘ 


' 


